Revit Architecture 2009

Imperial Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM03A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 . 159 . 164 . 171 . 177 . 181 . 181 . 184 . 187 . 189 . 192 . 197 . 197 . 201 . 205 . 208

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 . 213 . 219 . 223 . 226 . 226 . 231 . 233 . 236 . 238 . 244 . 252 . 255 . 255 . 257 . 260 . 264 . 264 . 266 . 266

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 269 . 270 . 274 . 274 . 284 . 286 . 291 . 294 . 295

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 . 302 . 309 . 313 . 314 . 317 . 319 . 323 . 324 . 324 . 325 . 327

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 . 343 . 349 . 349 . 351 . 351 . 355 . 361 . 361 . 363 . 365 . 366 . 372 . 373 . 373 . 374

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 . 398 . 405 . 409 . 413 . 417

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 418 . 421 . 425 . 430 . 431 . 434 . 436

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 . 438 . 439 . 441 . 443 . 444 . 445 . 446 . 446 . 449 . 450 . 450 . 453 . 453 . 454 . 460 . 460

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 . 465 . 466 . 469 . 472 . 473 . 475 . 477 . 478 . 482 . 484 . 487 . 490 . 497 . 498 . 505 . 509

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 531 . 542 . 544 . 544 . 547 . 550 . 553 . 554 . 555 . 558

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 . 563 . 568 . 571 . 573 . 576 . 578 . 580 . 581 . 584 . 592 . 592 . 594 . 595

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 . 610 . 616 . 618 . 622 . 622 . 624 . 627 . 630 . 630 . 633 . 634 . 637 . 640 . 644 . 646 . 650 . 655

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 . 659 . 667 . 671

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 674 . 674 . 677 . 680 . 680

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 . 684 . 691 . 695 . 697 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 716 . 719

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 . 724 . 724 . 728 . 732 . 735 . 740

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 . 746 . 756 . 763

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 . 778 . 787 . 790 . 792 . 795 . 795 . 797 . 801 . 802 . 803

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 809 . 811 . 813 . 814 . 817 . 817 . 821 . 823 . 826 . 831 . 833 . 834 . 837 . 837 . 838 . 843 . 845 . 848 . 849 . 851

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. and click Open. As you work in drawing and schedule views. scope. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.rte. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. If you move the partition. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In this case.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. the hierarchy of elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For most tutorial projects. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and open Imperial\Templates. and schedules required for a building project. schedules. In this case. the door retains this relationship to the partition. 13 Click OK. sections. and phases when you need it. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. you will use the default template. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. 12 Select default. click Training Files. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the operation of the software is parametric. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. construction. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. 2D and 3D view. In the Revit Architecture model. and plans. drawings. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You learn the terminology. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. drawing sheets. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the floor or roof remains connected. quantities. and residential. the parameter is one of association or connection. how to navigate the user interface. hence. and customize the project as necessary. every drawing sheet. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. review the Revit Architecture templates.

View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and reference planes are datum elements. tags. grids. tags. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. windows. filled regions. Understanding the Basics | 7 . ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. They display in relevant views of the model. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. They help to describe or document the model. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. walls. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly.When you change something. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. dimensions. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Examples include detail lines. and roofs are model elements. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. levels. and keynotes are annotation elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. programming is not required. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. windows. doors. doors. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and 2D detail components. If you can draw. For example. dimensions. and cabinets are model components. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. walls and roofs are hosts. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building.

you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Often. first floor. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The project file contains all information for the building design. floors. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and drawings of the design. and ceilings. you can explicitly control them. or bottom of foundation. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. section views. you must be in a section or elevation view. Most often. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.In Revit Architecture. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. schedules. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. This information includes components used to design the model. To place levels. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. By using a single project file. In other cases. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. However. views of the project. for example. top of wall. from geometry to construction data. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. Project: In Revit Architecture. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. families. and types. such as roofs. for example. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. elevation views.

ceilings. specifically its clear user interface. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. the user interface is labeled. and similar graphical representation. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. A type can also be a style. However. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ Type: Each family can have several types. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. and levels. A type can be a specific size of a family. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. making it easy to understand what each button represents. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. floors. For example. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. In the following illustration. System families can be transferred between projects. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families include walls. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. categories of model elements include walls and beams. dimensions. roofs. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. identical use. In the steps that follow. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled.

The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. By default. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. In addition. This creates a new project based on the default template. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. click (New). new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. For example. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Edit. and View. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. which are listed on the menu. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. While working in the drawing area. you type the required key combination to perform the command. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . When you select the Door tool. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. On the left side of the Options Bar. For example. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. a door type is specified. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. when you add a door.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available.

containing buttons grouped by function. In the drawing area. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. immediately below the Type Selector.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Show Design Bars dialog displays.

14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the tab in the Design Bar. select Views (all). ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser.11 Click OK. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

To open a view. sheets. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. families. schedules. elevations. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. 3D). so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and rename views. double-click its name. The browser is dockable. family category (doors. delete. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. reports. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . walls. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. and groups. windows). and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. families. and group name.

The cursor displays as a pencil. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. Do not click. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. In the bottom left corner of the window. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Wall. click Cancel. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In this case. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. After creating a browser organization scheme.

You can also press SHIFT+F1. click Modify to end the Wall command. There are several tools that help you find information. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. click on the Standard toolbar. If no Help button displays. press F1 for context-sensitive help. You can use this tri-pane. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. 20 Press TAB. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. in conjunction with tooltips. After you are familiar with these tasks. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. In the status bar. Windows: From any window. find a keyword on the Index tab. In addition. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. When you place the cursor over an element. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Click the Help button. Toolbar: From the toolbar. regarding selected elements in a view.18 On the Design Bar. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. press F1 for help. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. The status bar also provides information. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print.

1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 5 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. the view zooms out from the building model. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. For example. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

NOTE As you zoom in and out. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 10 To display SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. To modify or add snap increments. on the View toolbar. When you release the mouse button. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. As you move the mouse. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 12 Click and hold the mouse button. the view zooms in on the selected area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 7 Click in the drawing area. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. . use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out.

and double-click 2nd Flr. called drag controls. as shown. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Small blue dots.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 18 Click and drag the left control. click Settings menu ➤ Options. press ESC. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Similar controls. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. expand Floor Plans. bottoms. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. When drawing or modifying a building model. 15 To exit the wheel. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. These are the drag controls. referred to as shape handles. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. For more information about SteeringWheels. and click Help. to lengthen the wall. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. expand Views (all). Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. moving the wheel to the desired location. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Cnst. and select the wall. display along the ends. 17 Type ZR.

In this case. 23 Click next to the lower wall. click (Move). 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. and on the Tools toolbar. click to specify the starting position. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. as shown. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . After selecting the element to move. and click again to specify the ending position. for example. The table moves down. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the second item in the list. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 On the Undo menu. or press CTRL+Z. click Lines. 24 Select the plant. click the Undo command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Some commands. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. and click again to end it. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. such as the Lines command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this example.

29 To end the command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . On the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Modify. Press ESC twice. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. and annotate building assemblies. Use keynotes to annotate a detail.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Use detail components to define an assembly. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. or referenced as a drafting view. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. When you have finished these tutorials. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. In this tutorial. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. In Revit Architecture. detail. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. illustrating how building components work together. 27 . but for training purposes.

Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. for Name. click Training Files. and reference a drafting view. 3 In the Scale list. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .rvt. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. and click OK. scroll until the folder is displayed. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Drafting View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Window Head Detail. If necessary. create a reference callout. you will create a drafting view. import a DWG detail.

The model zooms out. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. 9 Type ZR. located directly to the left of the drawing area.dwg.). Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. displaying the extents of the detail. 6 In the Colors field list. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. click Training Files. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. as shown.In the Project Browser. The drawing area is still blank. 10 In the drawing area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. and click Open. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. select Black and White. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area.

13 Click Reference other view. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The view displays to the specified area. 12 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. to activate the view selection list. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . in the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail. and in the Scale list. 14 In the drawing area. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. click Callout.

linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. and in the Scale list. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Callout. 3 In the drawing area. 2 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. c_express_workshop_details_start. double-click the reference callout tag head. select Detail View: Detail. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. in the Type Selector. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a detail view defined by a callout.rvt.The reference callout is created. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. adjust the detail view display settings. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.

6 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Detail Views(Detail). for Name. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. and click Rename. double-click Wall Base 1. 8 On the Design Bar. under Detail Views (Detail). enter Wall Base 1. 4 Right-click Detail 0. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. click Modify to clear the selection.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser.

Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

and click View Properties.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 16 Click OK. right-click. 13 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). under Graphics. select As Underlay. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. for Display Model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. 14 In the drawing area.

By grouping detail components. Stud. 17 On the View Control Bar. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. click Detail Components. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. Directly above the drawing area. 20 In the drawing area. type 1' 6''. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. on the Options Bar. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail.Brick on Mtl.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. If the crop region is enlarged. 19 In the Type Selector. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. typical details can easily be placed. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . and press ENTER.

22 Press ESC twice to end the command. add the following detail components as shown. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 23 Using the same method. 25 In the Project Browser. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. and click Create Instance. expand Groups ➤ Detail. click Modify to end the command. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .4" Slab detail.28 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

consistent means of identifying building assembly components. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. and format keynote styles. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. In the next exercise. or instructions within a construction documentation package. in the type selector. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_express_workshop_details_start. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. map keynotes by material. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Leader. For more information about customizing a keynote database. click Keynote ➤ Element. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. click Browse.txt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. special notes. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.rvt. and under Keynote Table. and Free End are selected. You can customize this list. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. for Full Path. and verify that Horizontal.

If no value has been specified. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. Keynoting | 39 . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. Either move the text inside. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. a question mark displays. 8 Click to place the tag. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader.5 In the drawing area. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard .3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

16 In the drawing area. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 13 Click to place the tag.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. and click OK. 15 Select 07 21 00. 12 Click to place the leader arm. click Keynote ➤ Material.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You will now change all keynotes to keys only. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 14 In the Keynotes dialog.

Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. legends. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Only the keynotes remain selected. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Click Check None. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection).Boxed. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. 19 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. Select Keynote Tags. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values.All items within the selection display in red. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information.

you will create a sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Place views on drawing sheets. but for training purposes. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. update the project information element properties. Add labels to a title block.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block. In this exercise. In this lesson.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Project Sheet Layout | 43 .rvt. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. In the Project Browser. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 3 Click OK. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. In Revit Architecture. click Training Files. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. If necessary. scroll until the folder is displayed. or in the element properties of the title block.

Then. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. under Sheets(all). For Name. enter Sections/Details. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 5 In the drawing area. Click OK. To pan. double-click Checker. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. right-click A602 . 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. 6 In the Title Block. In this tutorial. click Modify to clear the selection. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. roll the wheel.4 Type ZR. 8 On the Design Bar. enter A602. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle.Unnamed. hold down the wheel and drag. you can enter ZE to zoom out. To zoom in and out. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Smith and press ENTER. and click Rename. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 7 Enter K. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on.

and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. 18 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Options Bar.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Name. in the Type Selector. select the title block. enter Design Development. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. (Left) is selected. For Client Name. click Text. 13 Click OK. enter J. select Text : 1/8''. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. 20 Click and type Project Status. Smith. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. The Family Editor opens. enter Freighthouse Flats. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. enter 4/10/2008. 16 Type ZR. For Project Status.

under Category Parameters. in the Type Selector. and verify that (Top) are selected. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. to add 28 Using the same method. 29 On the Design Bar. add Project Issue Date parameter. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. click (Load into Project). 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 23 On the Design Bar. and click. as shown. 22 Using the same method. click Modify to exit the command. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. select Label : 3/16''. as shown. and click OK.21 On the Design Bar. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar.

to a drawing sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . click Browse. Next you will create. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. for Name. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. select Override parameter values of existing types.30 In the Reload Family dialog. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. you will create.Project. for Full Path. representing the view or schedule. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. enter Keynote Legend . Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. a viewport displays. and under Keynote Table. and click Yes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.txt. place and modify a keynote legend. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. In this exercise. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. click Training Files.

Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. under Text. under Sheets (all). expand Legends. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. as shown. on the Appearance tab.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and click OK. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. clear Show Headers. and drag Keynote Legend . TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.Sections/Details.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click A601 . 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .9 Press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . The keynote legend is visible. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.

enter Keynote Legend . select Filter by sheet. expand Detail Views (Detail). 19 Click OK twice. as shown. not keynotes.Sheet. under Legends. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Keynote Legend . 16 In the Element Properties dialog.Project. for Filter. for View Name. and click OK. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. and click Properties. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. The Keynote Legend is now blank. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. click Edit. at the bottom of the Filter tab.

under Sheets (all). expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. as shown. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A0 .Title Sheet 1.The keynote legend is automatically updated. The view title with line displays below the viewport. 2 In the Project Browser. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view remains selected.

select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. 6 Type ZR. As part of a construction document set. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 5 In the Project Browser. by default. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. You can specify text attributes for view titles. Press ESC to clear the selection. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. as shown. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. expand Schedules/Quantities. define the information to include in a view title. or omit view titles from sheets. 3 In the Type Selector. The drawing list remains selected.When you place a view on a sheet. and zoom in on the drawing list.

8 In the Project Browser.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . while pressing SHIFT.Sections/Details and select A801 . right-click the selected sheets. select A602 . and click OK. under Sheets (all). NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them.Ceiling Plans. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. The drawing list display is updated. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. including only sheets that contain views. under Identity Data. clear Appears In Drawing List.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. the wall or column will move with it. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. it is good practice to test the constraints. For example. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a central service core. a curtain wall. If the grid moves. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. 57 .Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. As you develop the building design. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building.

click New. under Create new. notice four elevation markers. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and settings.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. construction.rte. In views that display elevation markers. levels. such as a door or window. from the product library. 3 Under Template file. verify that the second option is selected. select Project. In practice. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. with an RVT extension. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. West. and residential. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. To create the project file. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. views. and customize the project as necessary. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. For this project. 5 Click OK. After the beginning exercises. you use a template that is provided with the software. Creating the Project In this exercise. The new project opens. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. The project is stored as a single file. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. click Training Files. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. you will use the default template. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Projects. East. South. but contains no geometry. you load any required family type that is not in your project. and click Browse. and open Imperial\Templates\default. In the drawing area in the right pane. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. you design inside the elevation markers.

The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Families. locate the Project Browser. Schedules/Quantities. double-click Imperial. and click Training Files. 13 In the file window. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and other properties. Two level lines. and families in your project. 14 For File name. 8 Under Floor Plans. and elevation views created in the project by the template. reflected ceiling plan views. and duplicate levels. Sheets (all). delete.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. These views are customizable: you can rename them. enter Revit Retail Building. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. change their properties. as well as change their names. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. 7 If necessary. Creating the Project | 59 . You can add. sheets. then expand Floor Plans. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Groups. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation).Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. display in the south elevation. notice the Legends. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. expand Views (all). heights. As you design and document your building model. NOTE If you create a project without a template. 10 In the Project Browser. and delete them. schedules. such as schedules and legends. duplicate them. double-click South. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. content and building model reports. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). created by the template. Ceiling Plans. the view you see in the drawing area. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.

You change the names of the 2 default levels. to each other. You learn how the levels are locked. and on the General tab. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . view the Save reminder interval.rvt) is selected. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. and windows within the building model. expand Views (all). You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. so that when one level moves. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. doors. the other levels move and change with it. and double-click South. When you begin designing. verify that Project Files (*. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. or constrained. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. After you modify the two default levels. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building.15 For Save as type. you will want to save your work frequently. enter 00 Foundation. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Adding Project Levels on page 60. and press ENTER. 16 Click Save.

This is the Options Bar. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. If it does not. enter -6'. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. When you add the new level. 12'-6'' above 01 Entry Level. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. which should display by default. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. By default. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. and then move it up. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. not all the tabs are visible. and click Basics. 16 Enter 12'-6''. and click OK. Next.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. click Level. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 14 Click Plan View Types. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. enter 0'. 13 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. As you move the cursor. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. enter 01 Entry Level. Adding Project Levels | 61 . (You do not have to click to specify the start point. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. and press ENTER. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. view the Design Bar. and press ESC.

under Floor Plans. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . using a different option. 23 On the Options Bar. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. click Rename.18 In the Project Browser. enter 12'-6''. and move it slightly upward. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. add 3 levels 12’-6” apart above 03 Level. click (Pick Lines). 25 Click to place the level line. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 12'-6'' above the 02 Level line. and rename the corresponding views. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. and for Offset. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. click Level. click Modify to end the command. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 21 In the Project Browser. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. and enter 02 Level. or on the Design Bar. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 19 Click OK. If you create a level by copying it. 26 Press ESC. right-click Level 3. Next. you add another level.

If you select a level and click its lock. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. all the levels move.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Adding Project Levels | 63 . and you can move them independently. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. the levels are no longer constrained. Notice that by moving the top level. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. as shown. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained.

4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. and specify the grid line endpoint. double-click 00 Foundation. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. the column height changes as well. When the grid is complete.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. click Grid. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. select (Draw). specify a start point for the grid line. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. so that if the roof elevation changes. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. In the following exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Move the cursor up. click Modify. In a later exercise. On the Design Bar. By using the grid to control the placement of columns.

for Offset. and for Offset. Click to place the grid line. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. and click to place the line. Next. for Offset. and press ENTER. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. enter 25'. click Grid. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. On the Options Bar. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Enter A. enter 15'. and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. On the Options Bar. enter 25'. click (Pick Lines). Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. Creating a Column Grid | 65 .

■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. and specify the grid line endpoint. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.8 Press ESC. On the Options Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 25' and 15'. click (Aligned). as shown. click Grid. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0'. Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar.

click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 24 Press ESC. ■ Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 21 Press ESC twice. select grid lines C and 3. and press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip up.15 Starting with grid line A. click Dimension. until it is closer to grid line 5. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. Two pins display on the grid lines. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. The pins are hidden. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ESC. If necessary. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. click Modify. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. At the left endpoint of the grid line. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. By pinning these central grid lines. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 22 While pressing CTRL. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. and select grid line A. until it is closer to grid line A. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown.

35 In the Type Selector. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. 36 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble with Gap. 31 For End Segments Length. click . click Edit/New. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. (Element Properties). 26 In the drawing area. 32 Click OK twice. and select None. 29 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. click Modify. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. click Duplicate. enter 2''.Create a custom grid family type In some cases. 33 On the Design Bar. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. select grid line 5. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Center Segment. enter 1/4'' Bubble with Gap.

and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B.37 Select the grid lines again. and press ENTER. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. click (Grid Intersection). 43 Press ESC. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x49. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. select grid line A. and in the Type Selector. select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble. click Activate Dimensions. 47 Enter 18'. select all of the grid lines. and press ESC. 46 On the Options Bar. and unlock it. and on the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click Structural Column. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). Creating a Column Grid | 69 . Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. For Place By. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 45 While pressing CTRL. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click Finish.

create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. double-click 01 Entry Level. If it is unlocked. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. for From. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and click to place the target point of the camera. select 01 Entry Level. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. under Floor Plans. 52 On the Options Bar. lock it. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera.48 On the Standard toolbar. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. Next.

Creating a Column Grid | 71 . 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.

and click Rename. named 3D View 1 by default. and click OK. Adding Beams on page 72. Adding Beams In this exercise. under Views (all). 57 Proceed to the next exercise. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. In the Rename View dialog. The current view. Right-click 3D View 1. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and then copy them to subsequent levels. expand 3D Views. displays in bold under 3D Views.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. enter To Building.

click Beam. The view is currently set to Coarse. verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. under Floor Plans. view the icons on the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level.When you finish adding beams. 4 Click Medium. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. Adding Beams | 73 . 3 Click the Detail Level icon . The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. the icon on the right side of the scale. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click (Create Beam On Grid). you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. 8 While pressing CTRL. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. select each grid line.

13 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. right-click. and click Select All Instances.The selected grid lines display as red. click (Default 3D View). 14 Select one of the beams. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. under 3D Views. 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. click Modify. 12 On the View toolbar.

and click OK. (Element Properties). All of the columns display as red. 22 On the Options Bar. select 06 Roof. select 06 Roof. select 02 Level. 06 Roof. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. right-click. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. right-click. 21 With the column selected. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. Adding Beams | 75 . 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Select All Instances. When you created the columns. for Top Level. under Constraints. under Instance Parameters. press and hold SHIFT. 20 Click Cancel. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level.17 In the Select Levels dialog. and click Element Properties. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. click 24 Press ESC. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. which only extend to the 5th level. view the Top Level parameter.

under 3D Views. and if necessary. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .25 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. under Elevations. resize the view to see the entire structure. double-click South. the structural elements display only as lines. Because the Model Graphics Style is Hidden Line and the Detail Level is Coarse.

Adding Braces | 77 . you create 8 framing elevation views. 3 On the Options Bar. click Framing Elevation. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Adding Braces on page 77. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. To better add the braces to the structure. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Braces In this exercise. under Floor Plans.27 Save the drawing. double-click 00 Foundation. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Attach to Grid is selected.

double-click the elevation marker arrow.4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. The associated framing elevation view displays. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ESC to end the command. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid.

click to specify the start point of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. and when the endpoint snap displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B.6 Select the crop region (if necessary). Adding Braces | 79 . and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. 8 In the Type Selector. but when placed the braces are placed. click Brace. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them.

IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. After you add the final brace. Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. press ESC twice. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. The height of the roof lowers.11 Using the same technique. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . delete it and redraw it. and press ENTER. enter 59'. NOTE Do not copy or array braces.

but this time add them from right to left. enter 33'. Adding Braces | 81 . double-click 00 Foundation. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. under Floor Plans.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 14 On the Standard toolbar. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.

19 In the Project Browser. NOTE As you add braces. double-click South. double-click {3D}. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked).Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 80'. 24 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. double-click 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. under Elevations. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. enter 35'. 21 Select grid line A. under 3D Views. 26 In the Project Browser. click Activate Dimensions. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 23 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. as shown in the 3D view below.

30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. double-click 00 Foundation. and if necessary. and how to load specific families into a project. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. click and roof height. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. double-click 00 Foundation. beams. Creating a Foundation | 83 . under Floor Plans. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. Creating a Foundation on page 83. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. grid size. 31 Save the drawing.Test connectivity of the columns. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. After you load the pile cap family. under Floor Plans. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. Before you can add the pile caps. lock it. 28 On the Standard toolbar. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 29 In the Project Browser. and drag it away from the structure.

click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. and open Imperial\Families\Structural\Foundations\Pile Cap-Rectangular. Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. In the View Range dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. When the final pile cap is placed. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Level. under View Depth. 6 Expand Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). click Training Files. The pile cap has been added in the view. and click Create Similar. and expand Structural Foundations. The Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree.2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Unlimited. 9 Close the warning dialog. press ESC twice. A warning displays. click Edit. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. and drag it to the drawing area. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. under Extents. expand Families. and press ESC twice.rfa. In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select 81'' x 81'' x 36''. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. The foundation pile cap now displays. for View Range. Click OK twice.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. beam. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 .rvt. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\i_RRB_update_structure. click Training Files. You load new column. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. beams. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. under 3D Views. and braces that you used to create the building structure. and brace families into the project. you change the types of the columns.13 In the Project Browser.

and click Select All Instances.625. right-click. and click Select All Instances. double-click {3D}. right-click.0500. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. under 3D Views. click Modify. select HSS-Round Hollow Structural Section-Column:HSS20X. 7 On the Design Bar.Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select one of the columns. All columns in the building model display as red. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. select Round Bar: 1''. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Brace. 9 In the Type Selector. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Design Bar. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section:HSS8X4X. The building model displays the round hollow columns. 3 In the Type Selector. It is not available in a perspective or camera view.

22 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 3''. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Imperial\i_RRB_architectural. select Round Bar: 3''. click Training Files. and click OK. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the Round Bar: 1'' bar type. 17 While pressing CTRL. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). and click OK twice. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to Round Bar: 3''. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. but it is the only size of its type currently available. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. and changing its size parameter. click (Element Properties). under Dimensions. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 10 On the Options Bar.This not the size that you want to use. 15 In the Project Browser. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . Linking the Structural Model on page 87. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The brace type changes. for Type. enter 3''. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. After the files are linked. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. for d. 13 In the Name dialog.rvt. double-click Elevation 1-a. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click Edit/New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate.

click (Copy/Monitor). The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. and click Select Link. and click Open. depending on the project. 6 In the drawing area. Grids. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. click Copy. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. select Auto . The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. 5 On the Tools toolbar. however. double-click South.Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.rvt. and walls could also be copy/monitored. 3 Under Positioning. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file.Origin to Origin. under Elevations. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. structural members. 4 In the Project Browser. After the link is established. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. select i_RRB_structure_complete. select the linked Revit model. In this case.

delete the Level 2 floor plan. 13 On the Design Bar. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 15 In the New Plan dialog.8 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. while pressing SHIFT. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . select Multiple. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. right-click Level 1. click Finish mode. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. and click Delete. while pressing CTRL. 18 Using the same method. click Finish. for Floor Plan views. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. 9 In the drawing area. select Levels 00 through 06.

20 In the drawing area. 21 In the drawing area. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. right-click. select the Topography : Surface. First. under Floor Plans. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. enter Floor Plans. for Name. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 24 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. double-click 00 Foundation. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click.

29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. under Floor Plans. under Names. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. under Floor Plans. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. double-click Site. 26 In the Project Browser. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . select Floor Plans. click OK. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 34 In the 3D view that displays.25 In the View Templates dialog.

Adding Floors on page 92. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand 3D Views. and click OK. 36 In the Rename View dialog. enter To Building. Adding Floors In this exercise. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. and click Rename.35 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1.

click Lines. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. past the first vertical grid line.To create floors.rvt. In this exercise. On the Options Bar. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. On the Sketch tab. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. click Floor. select the top floor line. click Dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and railings are also created from sketches. Move the cursor to the left. At the top left corner of the grid. ■ Adding Floors | 93 . If the grid changes size. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. click Training Files. Some other Revit Architecture elements. stairs. click (Rectangle). under Floor Plans. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_floors. and then the first horizontal grid line. You are now in the Sketch Editor. and elements in the current view display as gray. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Leave this dimension unlocked. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as roofs.

4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Select and lock the dimensions. Do not lock the dimensions. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Do not lock the dimension. and change their values to 1'. select the top floor line. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 1'. Enter 1'. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. press ENTER. At the top left corner of the grid. and then press ESC. click Modify. Move the cursor to the left dimension. and click the temporary dimension value.

■ Adding Floors | 95 . enter 5'. double-click 02 Level. click Quit Sketch. on the Design Bar. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. using a different sketching technique. On the Options Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. under Floor Plans. click Edit. click Lines. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click Floor. On the Sketch tab. Next. and on the Options Bar. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 8 Select the floor. click (Pick Lines). you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. Select the three remaining floor lines. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. and for Offset. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser.7 On the Design Bar. They display on the floor sketch. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. and press ESC.

12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown, and lock the dimensions.

13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. The 02 Level floor displays. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Level. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 16 On the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Sketch tab, click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar, click (Rectangle).

19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line, and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line, and a lock icon displays. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level, and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Alternatively, you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level, and lock the edges. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 30 In the Select Levels dialog, select 05 Roof Garden, and click OK.

Adding Floors | 97

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 05 Roof Garden. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 32 Select the floor, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 33 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 35 On the Sketch tab, click Finish Sketch. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Roof on page 98.

Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.

98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

To create the roof, you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_roof.rvt.

Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar:

Clear Defines slope. Click (Pick Lines).

■ ■

For Offset, enter 6', and press ENTER.

5 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

Adding a Roof | 99

6 Select grid line 5, move the cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

7 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1'. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines:
■ ■

On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep), and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.

12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.

Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area, select the roof.

Adding a Roof | 101

14 On the Options Bar, click

(Add new points to the slab shape).

15 On the Options Bar, for Elevation, enter -4'', and press ENTER. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point.

Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof, on grid D, move the cursor down below the roof, and click to specify the section.

102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section.

23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. In section, you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view, select the roof, and on the Options Bar, click 27 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 28 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Structure [1], select Variable. (Element Properties).

Adding a Roof | 103

The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 30 Click OK 3 times. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan, select the section line, and press DELETE. 33 In the warning dialog, click OK. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Add swept fascias

36 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

37 If necessary, on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 38 In the 3D view, zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. In this case, the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 40 In the Type Selector, select Fascia - Roof Edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 41 Starting with the left front edge, moving counter-clockwise, select each edge.

104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Curtain Wall on page 105.

Adding a Curtain Wall
In this exercise, you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid, so if you resize the grid, the curtain wall resizes with it.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 105

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt.

Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 3 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront, and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. When you duplicate a type, you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. The type is saved in the project. 6 In the Name dialog, enter Retail Storefront, and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

(Element Properties).

Under Construction, for Join Condition, select Horizontal Grid Continuous. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 7'. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 3’ 6''. Click OK twice.

8 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Level, select 01 Entry Level. For Height, select 05 Roof Garden. For Offset, enter 2'.

106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the first curtain wall segment. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 2' from the grid lines toward the building interior.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar, click (Trim/Extend), and trim each curtain wall segment.

13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid, and lock the dimensions. If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. These dimensions are not in a sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the dimensions, but opt to keep the constraints when prompted.

View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 107

15 On the View Control Bar, verify the view settings:
■ ■

Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Entrance on page 108.

Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt.

Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. To better work with the curtain wall panels, you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display.

2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab, under the element list, click All. All the elements in the list are selected. 4 Under Visibility, clear one element to clear all the elements, and click None. 5 Under Visibility, select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. Do not select Columns, as these usually represent internal pilasters. 6 Click OK.

Creating an Entrance | 109

7 Zoom in to the entrance area, in the center of the 01 Entry Level.

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 9 Select 1 panel, press and hold CTRL, and select the other panels around the entrance as shown.

10 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

11 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 12 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 13 In the Apply View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK. 14 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 15 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Medium. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for, in this case an architectural elevation. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics, you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Creating an Entrance | 111

19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South. 20 Zoom to the front of the building. 21 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.

22 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.

23 On the Options Bar, click Add or Remove Segments. 24 Select the mullion that you selected previously, select another mullion to the right, and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

Creating an Entrance | 113 . 26 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 32 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 30 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 27 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 31 In the Type Selector. click Curtain Grid. select One Segment. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Modify. select Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. and unpin it.

you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 39 Optionally. 3rd. select it. 35 Zoom in to the first panel. and unpin it. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. and 4th panels. 36 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. remove the mullions from the 2nd. press TAB until it is selected. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 Zoom in to the front of the building. click (Default 3D View). Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 114. 38 Using the same process. open the North elevation. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and view the new entrance. 37 Press DELETE.33 On the View toolbar.

select 02 Level. and click View Properties. under Floor Plans. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Right-click in the view. double-click 01 Entry Level.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. click Training Files. for Underlay. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Graphics.

The cursor changes to a pencil. 8 Select the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. select the grip closest to the callout head. click Callout. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click to complete the callout.

and click Rename. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.9 In the Project Browser. enter Display Area. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. 12 Draw a section line. 13 Select the section line. click Section. and click OK. 10 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. 14 Press ESC. and click Flip Section. Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown.

21 In the Type Selector. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. expand Sections (Building Section). under Floor Plans. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. For Loc Line. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. right-click Section 1. Click (Rectangle).16 Select the section box. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 17’ x 17’ square wall inside the grid lines. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Finish Face: Exterior. enter Section Display Area. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 17 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.5 1/2'' Partition (1 hr). click Wall. select Basic Wall: Interior .

31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Press ESC twice. click (Align). under Ceiling Plans. 26 On the Design Bar. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay.24 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. click Ceiling. click Dimension. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. select Compound Ceiling: 2’ x 2’ ACT System. 32 In the Type Selector. and lock the dimension. and lock the dimension. Lock both alignments.) Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 27 On the Options Bar. select Wall faces. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid.

47 In the Project Browser. for Base Offset. 41 On the Options Bar. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. under Ceiling Plans. and click OK. Next. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. and click to select the walls. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 46 Press ESC.36 Press ESC twice. and click (Element Properties). and click OK. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Section Display Area. Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 37 In the Project Browser. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. click Modify. (Element Properties). for Height Offset From Level. double-click Section Display Area. enter 9'. 38 On the View Control Bar. under Constraints. under Sections. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 9'. click to select it. under Sections (Building Section). click 43 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Constraints.

and press ESC. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. click Edit/New. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . and click to select the walls. 49 In the Project Browser. view the ceiling structure.48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. under Construction. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Top/Base. under Ceiling Plans. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. On the Options Bar. and click . for Structure. press TAB until you select the wall chain. click Attach. click Edit. Select the 02 Level Floor.

click (Rotate). 58 On the Edit toolbar. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel.54 Click OK. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and press ENTER. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 123 .60 Click. 61 Press ESC. enter 45. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.

copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 65 On the View Control Bar.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 66 Optionally. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows On. click Shadows Off. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click To Building. 64 On the View Control Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 125.

rvt. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor over grid line B. and copy it to the 05 Level. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. under Floor Plans. enter 5'. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click to create a reference plane to the left. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 .Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_stair. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and for Offset. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and click to create a reference plane to the right. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser.

and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. shorten the right reference plane. 6 Select the left reference plane. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. C.5 On the Design Bar. and 3. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 7 Using the same method. click Stairs. 2. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

with a message that 22 risers have been created and 0 remain. select Basic Wall: Generic . ■ Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 .■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. Click (Rectangle). and specify a point. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. beyond the end of the stair. and select the 2nd reference plane. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. 10 On the Options Bar.8'' Masonry. click Wall. including its handrails. Move the cursor down. select Finish Face: Interior. The complete stair displays.

17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 15 On the Tools toolbar. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and lock the alignment. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 Using the same technique. click Align. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. click Dimension. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. press TAB until the stair edge is selected.14 Draw walls around the stair. and click to select it. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

21 Select the dimension. and press DELETE. 24 On the Standard toolbar. (Undo). 25 While pressing CTRL. 27 In the Type Selector. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. enter 4'. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. and press ENTER. select both reference planes. clear Tag on Placement. for Prefer. The stair and walls move to the left. select the dimension value. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. Select the wall. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. Lock the dimension. select Wall faces.20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . TIP To flip the door swing. Because the dimension is constrained. and press DELETE. Click Modify. and specify a point away from the wall. select Single-Flush : 36'' x 84''. Select the interior face of the wall. a warning displays. 23 Select the stair. Select the bottom of the stair. click Door.

(Default 3D View). select 05 Roof Garden. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. select 00 Foundation. click 36 On the View toolbar. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. For Top Constraint. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. click Modify. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. but if you view the top level of the building. 33 Select the stair. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click OK. and move the cursor to spin the building model. (SteeringWheels). click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 35 On the View toolbar.30 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). select all 4 walls. (Element Properties). for Base Constraint. for Multistory Top Level. Click OK. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected.

47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). (Rectangle). 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 44 On the Tools toolbar. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Align. and lock the alignments. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. and lock the alignment. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 131 . click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening.38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. under Floor Plans. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs.

50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 55 In the Project Browser. By offsetting the base. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Default 3D View). and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). on the View toolbar. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. (SteeringWheels). ■ 58 On the View toolbar. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. enter 1'. click see the roof. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. click 59 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. (SteeringWheels). Under Constraints. 56 Select the shaft. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. for Base Offset. and click OK. For Top Constraint. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches.

61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 133. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.

4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select Basic Wall: Generic . select 06 Roof. click Wall. The exact placement is not important. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 5 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.8'' Masonry.rvt. and click View Properties. double-click 05 Roof Garden. for Underlay. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click (Align). 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. and then select the right face of the wall. and open Imperial\i_RRB_wall_profile. under Graphics. and click OK. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 2 Right-click in the view. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall.

and click Open View.Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Draw a circle with a 4' radius just below the fillet arc. and click (Circle). as shown: Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 135 . and click (Fillet arc). select Elevation: South. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 14 Select the 12' 6'' vertical dimension value. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. click . click Remove Constraints. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. 15 In the error dialog. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 32' 6''. and on the Options Bar. click . 18 In the upper right corner of the profile. click Edit Profile. click Lines. and press ENTER. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall.

136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.21 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}.

24 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. as shown. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 .rvt. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. between grid lines C and D. click Component. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and open Imperial\i_RRB_host. select Planter : 48'' x 48''. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. TIP After you place the 1st planter. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 137.

and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 11 Select one of the trees. select the 2 remaining trees. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. enter Japanese Cherry 5'. click Edit/New. click (Default 3D View). click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. View the roof. 15 In the Type Properties dialog.Deciduous: Japanese Cherry . click Component. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. enter 5'. 14 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .5 On the Basics tab. under Dimensions. select RPC Tree . and then click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. as shown. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and click OK. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. and in the Type Selector. 8 On the View toolbar. for Height. 10 In the Project Browser. select RPC Tree Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 5'. under Floor Plans. 17 While pressing CTRL. and press ESC twice. 16 Click Apply. for Type.15'. (Element Properties).

double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. double-click 01 Entry Level. For Offset. 21 On the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . click Lines. and click to place the line. enter 8'. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 25 Using the same method. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. click Floor. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 8' below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5.

and click to finish the line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 32 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. clear Chain. for Offset. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to finish the line. 29 On the Options Bar. and click to sketch a line. move the cursor to the right approximately 4'. and click to sketch a line. click (Draw). enter 0'.26 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up 3'. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 30 On the Options Bar.

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. click Finish Sketch. 34 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. The completed sidewalk displays. click (Trim/Extend).33 On the Tools toolbar. 36 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 37 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the line between grid lines A and B.

for Type. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. When you render an image. enter -0' 6''. click 40 In the Type Properties dialog. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 48 On the Options Bar. enter Sidewalk. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 49 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. click Component. near Column E5. click Edit/New. a photorealistic image displays. 44 Click OK. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 45 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 50 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. select RPC Male: Alex. under Constraints. and click so he is facing the column.Next. click Duplicate. In plan view. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. as shown: (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height Offset from Level. 38 Select the sidewalk. 42 Click OK twice. select Rotate after placement. 41 In the Name dialog. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 47 In the Type Selector.

NOTE If necessary. 55 Press ESC twice. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 52 Move the cursor clockwise. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 51 In the Type Selector. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. select RPC Beetle. 53 In the Type Selector. about 30 degrees. select RPC Female: Cathy. 54 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and click to place her on the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 143 .

57 In the camera view (3D View 1). 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter -1'. Next. When you select a host for a component. and click OK.56 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. for Offset. click the car. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. and click (Element Properties). and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. double-click West. under Elevations. 60 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. click Pick Host. 59 In the Project Browser. Select a host for the RPC components 61 Select Cathy. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. under Constraints. and on the Options Bar.

pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. View the front of the building 66 In the Project Browser. 64 Click the sidewalk. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 63 Select Alex. click Pick Host.62 Click the sidewalk. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. under 3D Views. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 145. and replace them with a service core. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click To Building. 65 Using the same method. If the sidewalk changes height. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . and on the Options Bar.

2 Zoom in to the stairwell. walls.rvt. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and shaft opening. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. 3 Select the entire stairwell. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_service_core_. After the service core is positioned. including the stairs.

click Training Files. click (Default 3D View). 5 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. (SteeringWheels). you delete the entire stairwell. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. click OK. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 147 .rvt. Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and open Imperial\i_RRB_core.4 Press DELETE. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. click 6 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

10 In the Project Browser. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. and zoom in to the linked instance.Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click Create Instance. Click the inner top horizontal floor line. and on the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. expand Model. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. click Modify. right-click i_RRB_core. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 In the drawing area. click 16 Align the core: ■ ■ (Align). double-click 01 Entry Level. and notice that the linked file is listed. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. double-click 00 Foundation. 11 In the Project Browser. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar.

(Default 3D View). Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. click 21 On the View toolbar. click Modify. or if the group layout is expected to change. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group.■ ■ Click grid line C. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the core. 20 On the View toolbar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and on the Options Bar. click (top down view). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 149 . (SteeringWheels). click Ungroup. and click to align the center. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

After you modify it. click Training Files. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. click Training Files. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. in the Project Browser. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 150.rvt. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Renderings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. you add glass railings around the floor edges.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Conference. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 3 In the Conference project. where it is hosted within a railing family. The rendering displays. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.22 Proceed to the final exercise. 2 In the left pane of the dialog.

14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 2' to the left of grid line C. 15 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Window menu ➤ i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. expand Families. verify that Chain is not selected. press and hold CTRL. 8 In the Project Browser.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click Edit. The floor sketch displays. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it.rvt. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Handrail only. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and select Glass. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. click Modify. click (Split). and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and expand Railings. and click to split the floor. 5 Expand Railing. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Lines. click OK. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. double-click 02 Level. and Parapet.

move the cursor horizontally to the right 5'. click (Align). select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 5' long. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 26 Select grid line D. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and click to draw another line. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to place it. and click to draw another line. click (Align). and lock the alignment. 25 Select grid line B. move the cursor vertically 5'.19 Select the left endpoint of the floor.

click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click Railing Properties. click Dimension.rvt project. enter 4''. For Offset.29 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 153 . for Type. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Railing. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 33 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. Lock the dimensions. select Glass.

click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 154 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension.

You can view the railing that you just added. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 155 .A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.

156 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

157 . a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. lofty ceilings. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. NOTE For training purposes. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. slight modifications to the building design have been made.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. exterior fire stairs. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. balconies. and a roof garden. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.

158 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. 159 . elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. including plan. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You learn how to create new views from existing views. section. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. you learn how to create views from a building model. how to create section and elevation views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Duplicating Plan Views | 161 . and click OK. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.

right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 12 In the Rename View dialog. enter Vicinity Plan. 11 Under Floor Plans. and click OK. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Vicinity Plan. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser.

14 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Next. and click 1''= 80'-0''. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. Duplicating Plan Views | 163 .

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.rvt. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.16 Right-click.

click Elevation. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . 4 On the Options Bar. select Elevation: Building Elevation.rvt. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click Level 1. for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1/8''=1'-0''.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.

for Scale. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. select Section: Building Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. select 1/8''=1'-0''. enter South East. and double-click Level 1. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 167 . 11 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. 14 In the Type Selector. click Section. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. under Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation).Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). ■ Move the cursor down. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. expand Floor Plans. and click OK.

168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

and click to place it. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 169 . Click the midpoint of the section line. click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

click Modify. and double-click Section 1. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Sections (Building Section). using the blue circular drag grip. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar. To create each view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 171 . click Modify. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Callout. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select Floor Plan. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector.Resulting callout view . select 1/4"=1'-0''. double-click Level 1. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.

and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and select the callout boundary. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. Creating Callout Views | 173 .■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. and click to specify a point to complete the callout.

8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.■ Select the middle grip. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 9 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Enlarged Stair Plan.

double-click Section 1. Creating Callout Views | 175 . and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. select Detail View: Detail. for Scale.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). click Callout. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details).

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. the elevation markers. You change the appearance of the section mark head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 177 .

and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load into Project. and click OK twice. click Duplicate. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. double-click Level 1. clear any others. and click Open.Filled. select the section line.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Section Tail – Filled.rvt. Section Tail . click Edit/New. select the current project. 12 For Section Tag. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. for Section Head. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click OK. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. enter Section Head – Custom. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the floor plan. 8 In the Name dialog. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.Custom. select Section Head . under Floor Plans. select Custom-Section Head. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. and can be applied to the section line.rfa. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . .

For Dimensions ➤ Width. scroll to Section Marks. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. scroll to Section Line. 19 Click OK. click Training Files. 15 Under Category.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select 3/4'' Circle. select Circle. and select 2. and on the Options Bar. for Elevation Tag. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. Click OK. For Line Weight. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. and select 3. 17 Under Category. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. On the floor plan. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. enter 3/4''. and click OK. 27 Click OK twice. enter 3/4'' Circle. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 179 . click Edit/New. click Duplicate. On the floor plan. notice the circular elevation markers that display. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. click the Annotation Objects tab. select Custom-Callout Head. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. select 3. . 14 In the Object Styles dialog.

180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 36 In the drawing. 40 Press ESC. clear all others. . Click OK. click Load into Project. select the current project. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. For Corner Radius. click the Annotation Objects tab. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 34 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and select 7. select the callout. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. enter 1/4''. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 43 Under Category. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. click Duplicate.30 On the Design Bar. scroll down to Callout Boundary. for Callout Tag. and click OK. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius.

The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 49 Click OK.rvt. To accomplish this. Creating a View Template In this exercise. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 181 . you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.45 For Line Pattern. 46 Under Category. You learn to create view templates. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Dash. filters. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. masking regions. view regions. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and visual overrides. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. expand Callout Boundary. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. and select 4. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson.

7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 On the View Toolbar. clear Entourage. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Zoom to Fit. 4 On the View Control Bar.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. The crop region displays as red. under Elevations. and double-click East. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. under Visibility. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click (Hide Crop Region). Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. click OK. Creating a View Template | 183 . under Elevations. and click Create View Template From View. 16 In the Project Browser. 14 In the New View Template dialog. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. right-click East. 13 In the Project Browser. grids. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 12 On the View Control bar. and click OK. levels. under Elevations. 15 In the View Templates dialog. elevation markers. double-click North. Callouts.10 Under Visibility.

You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.17 In the Project Browser. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and click OK.rvt. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 19 Using the same method. right-click North.rvt. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Apply. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. edit the crop region as before. double-click Penthouse. 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.

select Penthouse. Under View Depth. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. for Bottom. View Range and Plan Regions | 185 . under Extents. for View Range. Click OK twice. right-click. click Edit. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. select Level Below (Level 4). under Floor Plans. double-click Roof Plan. and click Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level Below (Level 4). for Level.

and click Properties. select Level 4. Click OK twice. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. for Level. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Bottom. click Plan Region. click Edit. for View Range. under Extents. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Under View Depth. click Lines. right-click. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Roof Plan.6 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. 10 On the Design Bar.

select Unlimited. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Finish Sketch. under Extents. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. in this case. select Unlimited. click Region Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. for View Range. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 17 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Move you cursor diagonally. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. In the left corner of the building. click Edit. for Bottom. for Level. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 187 . click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). select the left endpoint of the outer wall.11 On the Options Bar. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Under View Depth.

188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. under Projection/Surface. After you apply the filter. click <No Override>. select Solid Fill. click Add. and double-click Level 1. under Views (all). You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. and click OK. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. Enter Hr. 5 In the Filters dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Rated Walls. under Categories. select Walls. expand Floor Plans. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. click Override under Patterns. 12 On the Filter tab. and apply a color. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 9 Click OK. under Basic colors. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Filters. 17 Using the same method. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 16 Click OK. for Rated Walls. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 10 On the Filter tab. for Color. click Edit/New. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 In the Filters dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Pattern. Select contains. select the red color. click the Filters tab.rvt.rating of the walls. click (New). 14 In the Color dialog. select Fire Rating. and click OK.

19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. To accomplish this. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Masking Portions of a View | 189 . click Remove. click OK. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. and click OK.

Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. and click Rename. 5 On the View menu. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click.rvt. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Show Crop Region. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Select Copy of Level 1.

8 Select the crop region. 11 In the Type Selector.7 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Masking Portions of a View | 191 . Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Masking Region. 12 On the Options Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. select Invisible lines. 9 On the View Control Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle).

under Floor Plans. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.14 On the Design Bar. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.Level 1. right-click Unit 18 Plan . you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.rvt. click Finish Sketch. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.

under Visibility. 4 On the View Control Bar. for Pattern. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. select Solid fill. click the current scale. 11 Click OK twice. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click OK. right-click.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click <No Override> to apply a color. click black. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Walls. and click OK. Working with Visual Overrides | 193 . under Pattern Overrides. for Color. and click Override. click in the Patterns field. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click 1/4''=1'0''. right-click. 7 Under Cut.

clear Floors. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 18 Right-click. clear Grids. click Modify. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. and click OK. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 16 Under Visibility. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

22 In the Line Graphics dialog. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. click Override. select Dash 1/16''.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. 21 Under Projection/Surface. under Lines. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. 25 Click OK twice. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click <No Override> to apply a color. Working with Visual Overrides | 195 . for Pattern. and click OK. 23 In the Color dialog. for Color. 20 Right-click. click a purple color.

196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the sofa. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click Projection Lines.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click OK twice. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. click By Category Override. 28 For Color. select a bright green color. click . right-click. 29 In the Color dialog. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog.

32 Select one of the lamps. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 197 . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. how to add views to the sheets. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. click . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. right-click. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. 33 On the View Control Bar. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.

and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Training Files. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.rvt. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and click OK.

Click OK. click Modify.Unnamed. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. enter A101. on the Options Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 199 . The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 5 When the title block highlights.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. enter Site Plan. 7 On the Design Bar. For Sheet Number. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and select the title block. expand Sheets (all). Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser.

For Project Number. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 2009. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For Client Name. enter J. enter For Approval. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 15 May. enter 2009-1. Smith. click Edit. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Project Name. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 Click OK. For Project Status. for Project Address. enter Freighthouse Flats. under Other.

Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. Adding Views to Sheets | 201 .Layout Plan A104 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 17 In the Project Browser.rvt. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Sections A108 .Elevations A105 . select the new sheet name. enter Floor Plan. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt.Elevations A107 .Stairs In the following exercise. and click Rename. right-click. and click OK. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A106 . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. for Name. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click Save.

202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 In the Project Browser. The red border around the view no longer displays. under Floor Plans. double-click A104 . Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. and click to place the view. under Elevations (Building Elevation). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. and click to place it.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. select Level 1.Floor Plan. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. double-click A102 .Elevations. under Sheets (all).

and click to place it. under Sheets (all).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).Sections. Adding Views to Sheets | 203 . and click to place it. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 8 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. click Modify. double-click A107 . align it with the East elevation. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail).

and click OK. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. for View Scale. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. . Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Stairs. 16 Select title bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click A108 . zoom in to the grip. 18 Under Floor Plans. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. move the cursor over it.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. click Modify. and press TAB until it highlights. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and on the Options Bar.

double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. and then make changes and deactivate the view.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 205 . 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. In order to do this. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

under Sheets (all). click Modify. double-click A107 .rvt. and click Activate View. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. right-click. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.Sections. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Select the building section view. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. enter 54'. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

double-click North. and click Deactivate View. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 207 . 7 In the Project Browser.6 Right-click. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.

as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. After you create the sheet. and click Properties. enter Title Sheet. and click OK. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. under Floor Plans. right-click.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. The camera view displays. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Camera. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. enter T. 208 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the new sheet name. You modify the view to hide the view title. 7 Place the camera as shown.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 209 . for Eye Elevation. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.8 On the Options Bar. For Far Clip Offset. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 60'. Click OK. For Target Elevation. Under Camera. enter 5'. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Extents. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 420'. select Far Clip Active. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on.

13 In the Project Browser. Under Model Crop Size. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 15 With the view selected. Click Apply. 14 Under 3D Views. enter 25''. under Sheets (all). 210 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Scale (locked proportions). double-click T . on the Options Bar. click Size. and then click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.Title Sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. for Height.

21 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. for Show title. . click Edit/New. enter Viewport/no title mark. and close the exercise file. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 22 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. and click OK. under Graphics. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 24 Click OK twice. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 211 .

212 .

You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.Level 1. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. You also learn to create different types of schedules. click Training Files. Tagging Objects In this lesson. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. expand Floor Plans. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. such as doors and windows. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. such as room and window schedules. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Because of the open style floor plan. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. 213 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan .

2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right. click Room Separation. and click Room and Area. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 5 Using the same method.

6 Using the same method. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 9 In the Tags dialog. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 215 .

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. type 8'. click OK. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click Modify. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click it. and click to place the room and tag. 16 On the Design Bar.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click Room. indicating that it can be edited.rfa. The room tag number displays in blue. and select the room tag. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 14 For Offset. click Training Files. type U18-1. 11 In the Tags dialog. and press ENTER.

place rooms and tags. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Click to place the new room and tag. Dining. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 22 Click the room text label. and press ENTER.18 Click the room text label. 19 On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. type Entry. click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and press ENTER. type Kitchen. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 217 . click Room. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 23 Using the same method.

under Floor Plans. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). clear Room Separation. and moving clockwise. 218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Unit 18 Plan . 27 On the Design Bar.Level 2. expand Lines. The rooms are already placed.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. on the Model Categories tab. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. but they need to be tagged. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. click Modify. click Room Tag. 29 On the Design Bar.

click Tag ➤ By Category. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. you learn how to place door and window tags. clear Leader.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 219 . Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.

6 Click the door tag for the entry door. 220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identify Data. and on the Options Bar. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. click Modify. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. type U18-1. click Properties).■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. for Mark. and press ENTER. type U18-2. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. Tagging Doors and Windows | 221 .9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

click Training Files. click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. select Window Tags. verify that All objects in current view is selected. and click OK. click OK.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 22 In the Tags dialog. 222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rfa. expand Floor Plans. click Load. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Under Category. and click OK. 20 In the Tags dialog. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Door Tags.

click Tag ➤ By Category. click Training Files. 4 Select a dining room chair.rfa. you learn how to tag furniture objects. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to load a tag. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and modify the tag placement and display.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 26 Under Floor Plans.rvt. 29 Save the file.Level 1. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. tag all untagged windows. select the edge to which the leader connects. 5 At the confirmation prompt. Tagging Other Objects | 223 . expand Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 28 Using the same method. double-click Level 2. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. select Leader. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). clear Leader. 14 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 12 Click the elbow control.8 Select the furniture in the living room. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 13 Optionally. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 11 Select the tag for the table. and drag it above the chair tag.

and click OK. click Modify. Tagging Other Objects | 225 . 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Design Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. double-click Unit 18 Plan . select Furniture Tag : Standard.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table.Level 2. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. click Tag All Not Tagged.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. 23 Save the file. 21 In the Filter dialog. select Furniture Tags. and click Modify. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 22 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. you learn to add schedules. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. and click OK. click (Filter Selection).20 On the Options Bar. click Check None.

that is.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Next. a schedule that lists every window in the building. Creating a Window Schedule | 227 . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. in which windows are listed by window type. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Finally.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Comments and click Add. 9 Click OK. click the Fields tab. 7 Using the same method. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 4 For Name.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. expand Floor Plans. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and click OK. select Windows. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. type Building Window Schedule. and click View. under Category. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 6 Under Available fields. right-click in the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click Training Files.

NOTE By clicking Show. right-click the schedule. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser. in large building models with many views. If no open view shows the selected element. click Close. and click View Properties. and on the Options Bar. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Show. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. However. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. you are prompted to open one that does.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. Creating a Window Schedule | 229 . 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog.

for Sorting/Grouping. 23 Click OK twice. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. The window schedule is displayed. under Other. and press ENTER. click Edit. click Edit. The window type schedule is displayed. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sort by. sorted by type mark. clear Itemize every instance. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. and click View Properties. for Sorting/Grouping. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. 230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Other. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule.

rvt. you cannot use them to tag objects. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. and double-click Building Window Schedule. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. unlike shared parameters. under Floor Plans. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. expand Schedules/Quantities. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. In this case. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. and sill conditions for a window can be found. double-click Level 2. jamb. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 231 . you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head.

and click Properties. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. under Other. for Name. click Add to create the new parameter. 5 Click OK. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. so that they are listed before Comments. Under Parameter Data. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. Select Type. under Available fields. select Construction. For Group parameter under.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. right-click Building Window Schedule. for Fields. 6 Using the same method. click OK. 12 Click OK twice. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. type Head Detail. select the following fields.

View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. type 2/A107. select Doors. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. expand Floor Plans. for Head Detail. and for Sill Detail. For example.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Schedule/Quantities. You then hide the column used for the filter. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 233 . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 14 On the Options Bar. Verify that Schedule building components is selected.Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Head Detail. click in the Head Detail header. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. type 1/A107. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Type Mark A. Under Name. 17 Save the file. and without releasing the left mouse button. TIP To select all 3 headers. Jamb Detail. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. and Sill Detail. type Window Details. click Group.Door Schedule. type 3/A107. type Unit 18 . for Jamb Detail.

expand Sheets (all). but is not included as a column in the schedule. select Mark. Type U18 in the third field. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 11 Under Field formatting. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. and click OK. click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields. and double-click A102 . The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. 10 Under Fields. select Hidden field. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. Select contains in the second field. verify that New Construction is selected. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields.■ For Phase. select Family and Type. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 4 Click OK.

Door Schedule. and drag it to the sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. click Unit 18 . Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet.13 In the Project Browser. click Modify. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 235 . 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. click Modify.

Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. select Number. to the right of Header text. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. and click View. under Category. select Bold. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. select Rooms. double-click Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise.20 Save the file. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. click Schedule/Quantities. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. right-click in the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. 8 Click OK. 5 Using the same method. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. under Available fields. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Text. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.

For 104. The room Number is U17-46. type Corridor. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 105. type Building Entry. Creating a Room Schedule | 237 . 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 103. select Corridor. 101-106. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. and press ENTER.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 102. next to Rows. add 5 more rooms. for Name. and press ENTER. 11 Using the same method. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. for room 101. type Storage. click New. type Stair. select Storage. For 106.

under Visibility. and click OK. expand Lines. click the bright green swatch. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. double-click Level 1. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. under Projection/Surface. 4 Click OK twice. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. For Weight. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.13 Save the file. click the Color field. select 9. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. click the Lines field. and modify room names. click Room Separation. draw the horizontal line.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. In the Line Graphics dialog. Under Custom colors. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . In the Lines field. click Override. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. place rooms from a program list. First. For Room Separation. you add room separation lines.

8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 9 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 239 . click Modify. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Room.

type 8'. select 101 Building Entry. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 14 For Offset. for Room. 11 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 On the Options Bar. for Room.

Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 241 . 20 While pressing CTRL. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 17 On the Design Bar. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. double-click Level 1. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. place the following rooms. 16 Using the same method. double-click Room Schedule. click Modify. under Schedules/Quantities.

for Rows. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .21 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. under Category. 31 For Key Name. 30 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. 27 Select Schedule keys. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. click 23 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Open the Room Schedule. type As Selected. and Wall Finish. and click OK. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click New. click Modify. select Base Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. type Units. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. while pressing CTRL. Floor Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. clear Room Bounding. under Available fields. and for all 3 finishes.

43 In the Filter dialog. select Room Style. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Rooms. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click (Element Properties). click Edit.32 Using the same method. 44 On the Options Bar. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. for Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 42 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Project Browser. select Units. for Fields. and click OK. and click OK. under Floor Plans. for Available fields. double-click Level 1. and click Properties. and click Add. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 Click OK twice. 38 Under U17-8. for Room Style. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 243 . under Other. right-click Room Schedule. click Check None. select Units. 37 Open the Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. click (Filter Selection).

and double-click Level 1. and 106. expand Floor Plans. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click OK. 103. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. and apply it to the Level 1 view. right-click Level 1. for Name. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.46 Open the Room Schedule. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. select Service. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Graphics. type Room Type.rvt. 48 Save the file. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Views (all). select Room Style. at the warning prompt. click 5 For Title. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. select Public. For rooms 102 and 105. click the Color Scheme field. for Color. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. (Duplicate). type Room Type. and click Properties. and click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. 104.

13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Visible. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 19 On the Options Bar. click the value in the Color column. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 14 Click OK twice.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . click Color Scheme Legend. and click OK. click Edit. and clear Room Separation. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Visibility. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Schemes. select the color legend. select Room Type. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Lines. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.

select blue. click Edit/New. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. (Element Properties). click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. 29 Click OK twice. for Swatch Width. under Custom color. and select Show Title. click Modify.22 In the Color dialog. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 24 Click OK. for Size. under Graphics. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Under Title Text. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. type 1/4''. respectively. type 1''.

volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. select Room Type. and click OK. for Color Scheme. and select Properties. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. select Rooms. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 247 . the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. double-click Building Section. under Sections. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Edit. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. click Color Scheme Legend. under Visibility. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Click OK twice. under Graphics. under Sections. right-click Building Section. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing.

select Units. 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. under Identity Data. 45 While pressing CTRL. 41 On the Options Bar.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. (Filter Selection). under Identity Data. 46 Click . and click OK. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). for Room Style. for Room Style. select Rooms. click . and click OK. select Public. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. select all the rooms in the stairwell. click Check None.

type Suites. click New. under Identity Data. select Service. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rows. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 54 While pressing CTRL. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 51 On the Options Bar. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. excluding the stairwell spaces. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. under Key Name for the new row. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 249 . for Room Style.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. double-click Room Style Schedule. and click . under Schedules/Quantities.

verify that At wall finish is selected. but not beyond it. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes. select the room on the left side of the top floor. The color fill extends to the roof. under Identity Data. and click OK. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. under Volume Computations. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 59 Under Room Area Computation. The color fill will extend to the roof. and click OK. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. select Suites.55 Click . Change room heights 60 In the drawing area.

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 251 . 70 For Limit Offset. and the living room. the dining room. for Upper Limit.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. under Constraints. click Modify. and click 65 For Limit Offset. type -10”. under Constraints. 72 On the Design Bar. select Loft. . select the stairwell room. 67 On the first level. select Level 2. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 71 Click OK. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). type 0’ 0” . 66 Click OK. 68 Click .

73 Save the file. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. double-click {3D}. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.

8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Add.EPDM. click Modify. 3 While pressing CTRL. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . select Material: Description. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Family and Type. and click OK. Creating a Material Takeoff | 253 . Select Grand totals.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 9 Using the same method. under Available fields. 4 In the Type Selector. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. click Family and Type. under Category. Clear Itemize every instance.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Roofs. For Then by. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.

for Name.50 1. under Other. select Calculate totals. under Available fields. 23 For Field formatting. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. click Edit. select Currency. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. select Material: Cost. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. select Material: Area.75 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. and under Fields. 12 Click OK. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. click the Formatting tab. Under Field formatting. 20 For Formula. and click Properties. 19 For Type.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. for Material: Cost. 21 Click OK. select Calculate totals. for Fields. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click Add. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. type Estimated Cost. 17 Click Calculated Value.25 4. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. click Estimated Cost. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.

Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . click the Format value. either within family components or within the project template. tag the line. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Digit grouping. 26 In the Project Units dialog. for Currency. 28 For Unit symbol. In this lesson. you create a shared parameter file. ensuring consistency across families and projects. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 29 Select Use digit grouping. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. adding the shared parameters to a family. and are defined and stored in an external file. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 255 . regardless of category. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. for Rounding. you create an exiting plan for the building. You draw a travel path line. 30 Click OK twice. not just for currency. 31 Save the file. creating a generic tag to tag the family. which inserts commas after every three digits. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. can be used for any number-based parameter. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. and schedule the total distance of each path. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. select $. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. The cost fields are formatted correctly. 27 In the Format dialog. and reporting the shared parameters.

for Name. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click New. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 Click OK twice. click Training Files.rvt. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type Exiting. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. type OfficeStandardsParameters. click Create. type Travel Distance. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 7 Under Parameters. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. for File name. and click Save. under Floor Plans. 9 Under Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.txt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.rvt. select Length. under Groups. for Type of Parameter. click New. type Path ID. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. for Name.

14 On the Design Bar. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. 10 Using the same method.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. click Family Types. select Constraints. group it under Dimensions. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. under Parameters. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Add. following the equals symbol (=). 13 Click Apply. 3 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. 8 Select Instance. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Load into Projects. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type Length. 9 In the Family Types dialog. for Travel Distance Formula. and select Instance.rvt. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 257 . in the Load into Projects dialog. under Parameters. under Parameter Data.rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. select Shared parameter. and click OK. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Type. for Group parameter under. under Dimensions. Click Training Files. 15 If necessary. click Add. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click Select. 12 In the Family Types dialog. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. If you have multiple projects open.

23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag.rft. under Category Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 19 On the Design Bar. click Label. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click parameter(s) to label).Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. under Parameters. 24 Click OK twice. click Training Files. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Select. select Travel Distance. and click OK. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click (Add Parameter). click Label. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes.

click Load into Projects.rfa. type Travel Distance Tag. 32 In the Save As dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. for File Name.28 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. and press DELETE. and move it down. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 259 . select Path ID. 35 Save the file. 33 On the Design Bar. and click Save.rvt is selected. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 29 In the drawing window.

You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. After the lines are tagged. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 6 Move the cursor to the right. and click in the center of the corridor.rvt.Placing. under Floor Plans. above the exterior door as shown. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. click Component. select Chain.Level 1. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. double-click Exiting Plan . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Tagging. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 261 . 12 On the Design Bar.Tagging. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. for Path ID. 17 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL. Placing. select the 2 dashed travel lines. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. through the door. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. double click Exiting Plan .7 Move the cursor down. 8 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Component. and click (Element Properties). 11 Select each of the travel path lines. type 1-1. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click outside of the building. move the cursor near the right corner. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Modify. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Chain is selected. under Constraints.Level 2.

20 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor down. click Component. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. move the cursor to the left. 262 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click above the door to the stair. and click. and click in the stair.19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify.

Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click Modify. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 263 . 28 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. click Tag ➤ By Category. Placing. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Tagging. 30 Using the same method. click Modify. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. for Path ID. .24 On the Design Bar. type Level 1 Exit Distance. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. and click OK. type 2-1. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. under Constraints. 33 For Name.

The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 49 Click OK twice. and under Field formatting. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select contains. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. under Schedules/Quantities. click Edit. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. for Filter. and click Properties. in the first field. in the second field. select Path ID and Travel Distance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Calculate totals. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 44 In the Project Browser. type 1-. click Training Files.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and in the third field. 36 For Filter by. type Level 2 Exit Distance. under Other. for Filter by. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. in the third field. and click Add. 264 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 42 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 35 Click the Filter tab. select Path ID.rvt. under Available fields. 50 Save the file. 38 For Sort by. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. select Travel Distance. 43 In the Project Browser. while pressing CTRL. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 41 Under Fields. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. type 2-. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.

7 In the Type Properties dialog.6''. click Schedule/Quantities. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 265 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Interiors ➤ C10 . under Identity Data.Partitions . and click OK. under Categories. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. for Assembly Code. 4 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Fixed Partitions. 9 Click OK twice. 10 In the schedule. right-click the Design Bar. expand C . and click Properties. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. click the Value field.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click View. right-click Generic .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . and select C1010145 . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. select Walls.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.

and click Next. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.11 Close the exercise file. select a location for the database file. 266 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 1 On the File menu. for Database Name. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. type Revit_Project. click OK. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.mdb). click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click the File Data Source tab. 8 In the New Database dialog.mdb. and click OK to create the database. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 6 Click Finish. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. the database display may be different than that shown. 3 Click New. under Database. 9 Under Directories.rvt. 11 Click OK 3 times. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Create. and click Next. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click Training Files.

and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. 13 Close the exercise file. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. For example. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 267 . Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Additionally. in addition to the Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.

268 .

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 269 .

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. 270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'.

click Edit/New. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click South. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. 6 Click OK twice. select Shared. 8 Select the Level 1 line. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Name dialog. If you did that now.rvt. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. The levels in the project are not shared. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. Relocating a Project | 271 .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). Under Constraints. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. type 1/4'' Head . Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. for Elevation Base. click Training Files. and click OK. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red.Shared Elevation. However. click (Element Properties). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 3 On the Options Bar. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change.

The elevation of the other levels remains the same. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. 12 In the Type Selector. type 325'. click Modify. 272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. select Level : 1/4'' Head .Shared Elevation. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. By typing 325' in this step. The south elevation is displayed. and press ENTER. 10 On the View menu. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. you specify the new location of the project.By selecting the Level 1 line. The base elevation now reads 325'.

14 In the Project Browser. the Penthouse level. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. as well as other views of the building model.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. select Levels 2-4. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. and the Roof Plan level. Relocating a Project | 273 . under Elevations. double-click North.

Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. 16 If you want to save your changes. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. 274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. radial. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. On the Design Bar. In Revit Architecture. multi-segmented.■ ■ In the Type Selector. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. In this case.Shared Elevation. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dimensioning In this lesson. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. You place linear. permanent dimensions are created automatically. click File menu ➤ Save As. select Level : 1/4'' Head . click Modify. Dimensioning on page 274. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. and angular dimensions. although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. and double-click Level 1. Creating Dimensions | 275 . The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. By default. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). and are created by selecting individual reference points. click Dimension. snap to wall centerlines. dimensions are aligned. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. and click to place the dimension. select it. 5 Move the cursor above the view. 276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.

and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 277 . click Dimension. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. click Modify. and select it. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. 7 On the Design Bar.

11 Using the same method. select Wall Faces. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. select the right side of the curtain wall. but below the first dimension that you placed. 16 Move the cursor up. above the plan view of the building. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 14 Move the cursor to the right. and select its left exterior face. 278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Prefer. 12 On the Options Bar. select the right endpoint of the planter. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter.

and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. 25 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 18 On the Basics tab. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial . 22 In the Name dialog. 27 Click OK twice.3/32" Arial . click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. for Dimension String Type. enter Linear .Baseline. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. enter Linear .Ordinate. click Duplicate. Creating Dimensions | 279 . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. for Dimension String Type. select Ordinate. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. . Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. select Baseline. and on the Options Bar.

3/32" Arial . 34 Click OK. and in the Type Selector. 280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . to the left. 33 Under Text Fields. 30 In the Type Selector. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text.Baseline. for example Text dialog displays.29 Select the dimension string. select Linear . verify that Use Actual Value is selected. below. . The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. for Below. select Linear . or to the right of a permanent dimension value. enter Planter.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style.

For Prefer. select Wall faces.35 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 281 . and select it. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). click Modify. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. click Modify. click Dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. and specify a point to place the dimension.

. click Modify. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog. for Suffix. and click OK.42 Select the radial dimension. 46 On the Basics tab. 44 With the dimension still selected. 282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. type Typ. click the dimension text.

For Prefer. 50 Select the horizontal line. verify that Wall faces is selected. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). Creating Dimensions | 283 . click Dimension.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 3. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . expand Views (all). Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 284. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. When you dimension the wall. 53 On the Basics tab. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. and click to place the dimension. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. you select only the wall.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Modify. expand Floor Plans.

Click OK. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 285 . select Entire Walls. select Wall centerlines. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. and select Widths.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Options. select Openings. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. click Dimension. For Pick. and click to place the automatic dimension string.

you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. However. expand Views (all). you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for a multi-segmented dimension.7 On the Basics tab. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. When you place dimensions. 286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . expand Floor Plans. in some cases. and double-click Level 1. click Modify. Controlling Witness Lines on page 286. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. For example.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. select Individual References. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. Controlling Witness Lines | 287 . For Pick. and select it. verify Wall centerlines is selected.

move the cursor down. 10 Using the same method. 288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the right edge of the planter. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and select it.7 Using the same method. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint. and click to place the dimension.

select it.11 Move the cursor down. select Wall centerlines. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. and when the wall centerline highlights. and specify a point to place the dimension. 13 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 289 . 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. for Prefer.

19 Release SHIFT. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 18 While pressing SHIFT. and drag the dimension down the wall. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark.15 Moving the cursor to the right. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. text font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. drag it to the right. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 291. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 291 . and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. click Modify. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. and using the same methods. you change the dimension tick mark.20 Click the blue middle grip. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 22 On the Basics tab. After you create the new family type.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. for Tick Mark. type Office Standard. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click OK. 2 Click (Element Properties). and select the lower dimension. click Duplicate. select Arrow 30 Degree.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Name dialog.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.

click Modify. type 1/8”. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 293 . ■ Click OK twice. select another font. click Modify. 10 On the Basics tab. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. and select the bottom dimension. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 7 On the Basics tab. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. For Text Font.■ ■ Under Text. select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. for Text Size. 9 In the Type Selector.

Creating Text Annotation In this lesson.11 Using the same method. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. select the angular dimension on the planter. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. Creating Text Annotation on page 294. 294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and how to add leaders to the text notes. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. create a new angular dimension type.

click Text. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. for Leader. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click (None). but below the upper dimension string. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295 . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click and drag to create a text box.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Arc Leaders. and click . If so. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. and click OK. under Graphics. click Edit/New. type 1/4''. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 296 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 7 Select the text box.5 In the text box. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Under Text. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. click Duplicate. for Text Size. type EXISTING BUILDING. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 297 . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader).Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and type Planting Bed. click Text. ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 15 On the Design Bar.

23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. select CityBlueprint. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. type Standard Notes. 298 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Leader Arrowhead. 24 On the Design Bar. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. Click Rename. Under Graphics. 20 On the Design Bar. for New. In the Rename dialog. Under Text. Click OK twice. click Edit/New. and click OK.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. click Modify. for Text Font. click Modify.

for Leader. 31 Click in the text box. click Text. and type 18'' Conc. click (Arc). Wall. select Text: Standard Notes. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 299 . and click Modify. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. 26 In the Type Selector. click to place the text box. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. over the Planting Bed text. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As.32 If you want to save your changes. 300 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

plywood. like a standard door header condition. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you trace over the building model geometry. and metal studs. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. These components display at the required scale. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. In the callout view. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. add detail components. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. 301 .Detailing 7 In this tutorial. In order to detail from the building model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail.

and insulation objects. double-click the detail callout head. region objects. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select As underlay. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Detailing the View In this exercise. and click Open. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Exact location is not important.rfa. 7 In the drawing area. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. They are also view specific. click Detail Component. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects.rvt. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. The roof overhang detail displays. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. you detail the view of the roof edge. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. You load detail components. which means that all detail components. click Training Files. After you add components. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. as well as detail lines. 5 In the alert dialog. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Duplicate. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. select Corrugated Metal. enter 1' 4". 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 13 In the Name dialog. click (Element Properties). 17 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar.8 Delete the component. 16 Click OK twice. Detailing the View | 303 . and click OK. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. for Pattern ➤ Detail. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 15 For Spacing. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Repeating Detail.

24 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. click Detail Component.rfa. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.19 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Click Modify. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click (Move). Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Load. and click Open. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected.

press SPACEBAR 3 times. and click Open. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Detailing the View | 305 . 30 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. and place it in the detail view as shown.Because you still have several components to load.rvt. click OK. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. you load them as a group from a single file. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 To properly orient the component. click Training Files. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 33 In the Type Selector. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8.

38 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 37 Click Modify. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". and click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select Chain. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.

Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. 42 Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. as shown. (Move). For Offset. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Detailing the View | 307 . select to near side. enter 5 1/2". and on the Edit toolbar. click Insulation.

45 In the Type Selector. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12.■ Click Modify. 51 Click Modify. 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". as shown. and lock the component. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". click Detail Component. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Type Selector. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector.

9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. click Detail Lines. they are view specific. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Like detail components. 7 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. For Offset. and press ENTER. Adding Detail Lines | 309 . Adding Detail Lines on page 309. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. select Thin Lines. meaning they display only in this view. you add lines to your detail.rvt. click Detail Lines. 4 Click Modify. select Thin Lines. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. 2 In the Type Selector. as shown.52 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 1/4".

enter 1/4". as shown. select Medium Lines. select Chain. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component.10 On the Design Bar. click (Draw). 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 11 In the Type Selector. and clear Chain. click Detail Lines. For Offset. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. and draw the detail lines as shown. as shown.

Adding Detail Lines | 311 . draw the detail lines as shown. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. and click Properties. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select the Penthouse level line. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click OK. select Thin Lines. When you turn the display model off.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Do not display. right-click. 18 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View Control Bar.

27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 30 In the Type Selector. 26 In the Type Selector. 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. For Offset. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. enter 1/2". click Detail Component. select Break Line. select Vapor Barrier. and press ENTER. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes on page 313. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Enter the text. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. click Text. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. and click to place the dimension. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Text Notes | 313 . 3 On the Options Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale.32 Click Modify. click Dimension. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Text Notes In this exercise.rvt. you add text notes to complete the detail. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

clear Detail Items and Dimensions.Keynotes. and click the dimension text. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. (Filter Selection). you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. select a text note. and press DELETE. enter Roof Overhang Detail . enter Typ. Creating Detail Components on page 314. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click Rename. on the Options Bar. click 6 In the Filter dialog. right-click. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click. click Roof Overhang Detail. click Select All Instances. and click OK. 8 Select the dimension line. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail.. right-click. for Suffix.7 Click Modify. under Text Fields. and save the exercise file.

select all the coping linework. and click Open.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. select Medium Lines. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. while pressing CTRL. pressing TAB. in the Type Selector. 7 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. click Training Files. 14 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 16 Click Modify.rft. and selecting the chain. 15 Use a window to select all linework. Creating Detail Components | 315 .

Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.Keynotes view is not the open view. and click Save. While pressing SHIFT. enter Roof Edge.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 21 To place the component. click Detail Component. click . navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. The original linework remains selected. 22 Click Modify. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 Using the same method used previously. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Adding Keynotes on page 317. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. and click Open. click Load. navigate to your preferred location. 23 Using a window. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and the component can be placed in the detail. click Load into Projects. and click OK. 18 In the Save As dialog.rfa. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. delete the underlying linework. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 25 In the Filter dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. 30 In the drawing area. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. select the coping. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. 26 Press DELETE. click Training Files. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. double-click it in the Project Browser. for File name. clear Detail Items.

3/4" Plywood. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. use keynote 06160.C1. and click OK. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. Click to place the leader arm.B5. click Keynote ➤ Element. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. use keynote 07645.rfa. For the metal coping. and click Open.rvt.Adding Keynotes In this exercise.D11. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. you place keynotes on objects. Roof Edge4. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click Training Files. In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Adding Keynotes | 317 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 2 In the alert dialog.

for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 12 On the Design Bar. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06160. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. FasciaProfile_1. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. 11 Click OK 3 times. For the 2x6. For the 2x8.A8. 18 Save the file. click Keynote ➤ Element.D1.20 Ga. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. select the metal fascia with drip edge. You do this in order to keynote the component. using keynote 07460.I1. use keynote 06110. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.G1. For the 2x12.D11. 17 Keynote the component. navigate to 07645. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. click Detail Component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . 10 In the Keynotes dialog.F1. use keynote 06110.6 Click Modify. use keynote 09250. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 319. select Corrugated Metal. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . use keynote 06110. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties).F1.

click Training Files. and click Open. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click (Element Properties). 16 Select the component. 19 In the Name dialog. 11 Press DELETE. click Detail Component. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 15 Click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector. 6 Lock the line. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 5 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. select Medium Line Detail Component. and select the right end point. click Load. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. and click Save. navigate to your preferred location. and click Modify. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 319 . enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Load into Projects. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Duplicate. 22 On the Options Bar. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. click Lines. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar.rvt. select the left end point of the reference line. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. for File name.rft. 4 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. 20 Click OK 3 times. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

You add the components to the project and keynote them. 40 Click Modify. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. 30 Click Modify. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and assign it keynote 07260. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click Duplicate. invisible. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Detail Component. and click . 27 On the Design Bar. 37 Click OK 3 times. and click .G1. name the component Air Barrier. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. click Edit/New. 48 Using the same method used previously. click in the Value column. click Detail Component. (Move).A1. 29 In the drawing area. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 38 On the Design Bar. and click Open. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 Select the component just added. 44 On the Design Bar. select i_Light Line Detail Component. click Training Files. against the 3/4" plywood. 49 With the component selected. and i_Light Line Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. enter EPDM Membrane. and click . and hidden) used in the view. and assign it keynote 06110. 46 Click Modify. 25 Next. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.A5. 42 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and click OK. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and click the lower end at the break line. 47 Select the component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 24 While pressing CTRL. 34 In the Name dialog. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and click . 31 Select the component. on the Edit toolbar. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component.

54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. 55 Click Modify. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 321 . click Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select Chain. leaving the detail component lines. 52 In the Type Selector. and click . 53 On the Options Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.

Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component.58 Using the method used previously. click Detail Component. select the component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.A4. click Load into Projects.rfa. 67 In the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 07260. Air Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element. and Vapor Barrier. 63 In the drawing area. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. in the Type Selector. 68 In the drawing area. name the component Vapor Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 2 x 8 Framing. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 60 On the Design Bar. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa.

Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.txt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Each keynote displays as a simple number. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. Enter 07463. click File menu ➤ Save. and click . add a keynote for the component. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. 11 Click Modify. under Keynote Table.txt.69 Select the component. click to place the leader. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A1. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. under Path Type. 3 In the text editor. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. and click to place the note. Enter 07460. 72 Save the file. and click OK. select Absolute.A4.A9. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. and assign it keynote 07210. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and press TAB. select all the keynotes. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.. 70 Using the method used previously.A1. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 71 In the drawing area. and press ENTER. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and click Open. navigate to 07463. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). The database file opens in a text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 9 In the drawing area. and close the text editor. In the Type Selector. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and press TAB.rvt. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 323 . and click OK. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Browse. name the component Batt Insul.

Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. select 3" = 1'-0". 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.Center to Center is selected. After you create a drafting view. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Colors. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Positioning. 14 Save the file. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry.rvt. click Training Files. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. for Scale. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. you learn how to create a drafted detail.dwg. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Black and White.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. The detail that you import is in DWG format. verify that Auto . 13 Click Modify. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.rvt. right-click Drafting 1. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported.■ Click Open. and click OK. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. enter EPDM Metal Coping. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 6 Select the callout. click Callout. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. select Reference other view. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Creating a Reference Callout | 325 . 5 Click Modify. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 325. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 3 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

click Edit/New. click Modify. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing ./Details. click Rename./Sect. and click OK. enter Detail . The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. double-click A105 . for New. The callout is updated with the sheet information.No Reference). The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).No Reference. and double-click the callout.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Click OK twice. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. delete the existing value. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 10 In the Rename dialog. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail .Elev. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.

18 Save the file. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 327 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. for Name. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 3 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 .rvt. enter Header @ Sliding Door. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.

and click OK. select Wide Lines. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Click OK 3 times. Draw a rectangle as shown. enter Gyp. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . for Name. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. 17 Click Modify. Board.5 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. select the width dimension. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. and enter 5/8". select Gypsum-Plaster. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. click . click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Region Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Duplicate. 18 While pressing CTRL. click Edit/New. 11 In the Name dialog. 20 On the Design Bar.

and on the Edit toolbar. Move the cursor up. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). 24 Select the mirrored region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 .Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. (Draw).

for Name. 33 Click OK 3 times. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. in the Type Selector. 30 In the Name dialog. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing .25 Click Modify. click Edit/New. click (Align). Draw a rectangle as shown. select Medium Lines. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. verify that the thickness is 3/4". 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. and click OK. click (Rectangle). 29 In the Type Properties dialog.Finish. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Duplicate. enter Wood . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Finish. On the Options Bar. select Wood . Select the right edge of the lower 2x6.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 40 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. click Finish Sketch. select Medium Lines. click Filled Region. sketch the new region as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . click . For Offset.37 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". 38 On the Design Bar. 42 On the Design Bar. enter 1/4". click Finish Sketch. 39 In the Type Selector. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. Select Chain. and click to select the point. click Filled Region. (Align). 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter 3/8". 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. For Offset. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click to select the point. Move the cursor left 1". and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Move the cursor right 1". and press ENTER. enter 0. 47 Click the reference plane. Move the cursor down 1'. click 48 Click Modify.46 On the Tools toolbar. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. For Offset. and click to select the point.

and right edges of the door panel region. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. select Medium Lines. 56 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 60 Select the left. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . click (Trim/Extend). click Detail Lines.54 On the Tools toolbar. 58 In the Type Selector. top. and press ENTER. and select the bottom horizontal line. enter 1/8". For Offset. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. and click Open. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 68 Click Modify. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.rfa.61 Click Modify. click Load. enter 3". navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. select the height dimension. click Detail Component. and press ENTER. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 65 On the Options Bar. 69 Select the bolt. 62 Select the left detail line. click Training Files.

click .70 On the Design Bar. use the images as a guide. select Wide Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Training Files. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 79 In the Type Selector. 76 In the Type Selector. and click Open. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 78 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. click Load. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Detail Component. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.rfa. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. select Thin Lines.

87 Click Modify. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. (Mirror). 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. click . 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region.82 Select the rectangle. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 85 On the Options Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 .89 On the Design Bar. as shown. select Medium Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. click (Mirror). 92 Select the line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. and on the Edit toolbar. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector.

draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 99 Click Modify. and click to place the arc as shown. and press ENTER. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 103 Add two break lines as shown. select the length dimension. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click . select Break Line. 95 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. enter 1/8". 101 On the Design Bar. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 102 In the Type Selector. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 97 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines.

The dimension display is updated. . 106 Click to place the dimension. click Duplicate. click Dimension. 113 Click OK 3 times. Select Suppress 0 Feet. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. for Text ➤ Units Format. select To the nearest 1/16". select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 105 In the drawing area. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. the new style displays only inches. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. enter Detail Linear . and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 107 Select the dimension line. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot.3/32" Arial. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 339 . 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Rounding. 110 In the Name dialog. click Dimension. and click OK. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify. 114 On the Design Bar.

for Below. 117 Select the dimension line. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 340 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension.3/32”Arial. 121 Click OK. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and enter Varies. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . and then click the dimension text. and click Modify. enter See Schedule. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. under Dimension Value. select Replace With Text.115 In the Type Selector. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. 120 Under Text Fields. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip. click Dimension.

and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. under Dimension Value. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 341 . 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. select Replace With Text.125 Select Modify to end the command. 130 Click OK. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 128 Click OK. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. and click the dimension text.

Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. 134 Enter Gyp. Board. click to create an arced leader. and click Modify. 132 In the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. 135 Select the note. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and on the Options Bar. 133 In the drawing area. 139 Save the file. 138 On the Design Bar. 342 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click to place the text. select the gypsum board region on the left. click Text. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. and double-click East.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 343 . Creating a Note Block In this exercise. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson.

type 1. click Modify. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.rfa.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.Hexagon. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Number of Leaders. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 7 On the Design Bar. click Symbol. click Training Files. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select the keynote.

and click above the tag to place the copy. on the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. type Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Copy). click (Element Properties). under Identity Data.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. Creating a Note Block | 345 . 13 Select the tag. for Text. and click OK. 12 On the Edit toolbar.

type B.14 With the copy selected. type Repair existing door surround. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Copy. click (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. (Mirror). 19 With the tag selected. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Options Bar. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 18 Using the same method. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. and click. 15 For Text. on the Edit toolbar. 16 For Tag. 17 Click OK.

22 Optionally. Repair as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Remove all existing windows. using the table as a reference. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 347 . Repair existing door surround. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Tuckpoint as required. Clean exterior brick wall. click Modify. Clean existing concrete loading dock. and moving counter-clockwise.21 On the Design Bar. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.

Create.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. verify that Arial is selected. 29 In the Project Browser. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. select Center. Select Text. for Heading. select Tag. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and drag it to the sheet. 26 Click OK. and select Bold. On the Formatting tab.Elevations. select Exterior Construction Notes. expand Sheets (all). for Sort by. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 28 In the Project Browser. and double-click A103 . select Tag. type Mark. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. for the value. under Available fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type Description. type Exterior Construction Notes. format. type 1/4''. and click Add. and for Alignment. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . On the Appearance tab. and click OK. 27 In the column header (text). expand Schedules/Quantities. for Header text. and click Add. for Note block name. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet.

you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. double-click T . click Modify. Using Drawing Lists | 349 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.31 On the Design Bar. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.Title Sheet.

350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type T. select Sheet Number.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. The drawing list displays. On the Filter tab. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select does not equal.Title Sheet. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. Select Sheet Name. double-click T . 7 In the Project Browser. 5 In the list title field. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. for Sort by. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. in the first field. ■ 4 Click OK. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Filter by. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. and click Add. in the second field. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. and in the third field. under Available fields. select Sheet Index. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. click Modify. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Finally. On construction documents. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. and so on). you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. On construction documents.9 On the Design Bar. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. For the text. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Training File Using Legends | 351 . doors. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. windows. door frame schedule. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. 11 Save the file. and door frames. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls.

You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click Symbol. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type 1/8''. you create a text type with the necessary size. for Name. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Open Level Head . and click OK. type Typical Symbol Legend. type Legend Text. click . 6 On the Options Bar.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 9 For Text Font. click Duplicate. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Edit/New. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 10 For Text Size. click Text. for Name. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. select Arial.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. and click OK.

and for Leader. and click to place it. 14 Working from the top down. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. verify that is selected.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. expand Sheets (all). verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. click Typical Symbol Legend. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. expand Legends. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Symbol Legend | 353 .Site Plan/Floor Plan. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and double-click A101 .

17 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.Unit 18. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. under Sheets. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the file. 22 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. click Modify. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. double-click A102 . 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark.

select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. 8 On the Design Bar. type 3'. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. for Family. type 4th Floor Wall Types. For View. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. For Host length. for Name. click Legend Component. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. and on the Options Bar. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component.rvt. and click OK. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. select Section. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Select the second wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. click Modify. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . and press ENTER. 3 For Scale.

11 In the Type Selector. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click Text. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 12 On the Options Bar. click to add text without a leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. for Leader.

Creating a Component Legend | 357 . The text note with leader is added to the legend. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 18 Type the following text. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.

and drag it to the new sheet. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. under Legends. right-click Sheets (all). and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click OK to accept the default titleblock. drag it onto the sheet. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click New Sheet. 24 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 22 In the Project Browser. select Level 4.

allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. Creating a Component Legend | 359 . The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. 28 In the Project Browser. click (Match Type). indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select the Wall Type 2 component. double-click Level 4.25 On the Design Bar. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.

32 In the floor plan view. 34 On the View Control Bar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. select Detail Level: Medium. 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 33 Select the patio divider wall.

unanticipated changes in construction conditions. under Floor Plans. contractor inquiries. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. In this exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. or changes in building material availability. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. These changes can be due to owner requests. double-click Level 4. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.35 Optionally. click 36 Save the file. Using Revision Tracking | 361 . You can create a sequence of revisions. Using the table.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type.

any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In general. if the active revision is number 1. 7 Under Show. When you use this option. yet as concise as possible. verify that Per Project is selected. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. If Visible is not selected. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. If you select Per Sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. In most instances. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 5 For Description. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. When Issued is selected. type a date. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. for Numbering. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . For example.

click (Move). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. move the cursor up. 5 Select the divider.rvt. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 6 On the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. under Floor Plans. you make changes to the project floor plan. double-click Level 4. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.8 Click OK. Revision clouds have read-only properties. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. click Modify. including revision number and revision date. 4 On the Edit toolbar. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Sketching Revision Clouds | 363 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Save the file. 3 Select the divider. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.

The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Revision Cloud. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 11 On the Design Bar. click near the partition you moved.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Snaps Off. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 8 In the drawing area. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. In the Snaps dialog. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode.

click the Annotation Objects tab. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 365 .Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. for Line Weight. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. 17 Save the file. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 16 Click OK. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. select 6.

notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click to place the tag. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 5 In the Tags dialog. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. you create additional revisions in the revision table. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. 12 Save the file. and because the revision is the first in the project. Because you chose to number by project.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You then issue a revision. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.rfa. scroll down to Revision Clouds. double-click Level 4. 8 In the Tags dialog. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. Training File 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. 6 Click Load.rvt. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. you need to add one. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. the cloud is tagged as number 1. select Leader. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category. 10 In the drawing area. click OK. Working with Revisions In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Tags.

Working with Revisions | 367 . 7 For Description. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. type Modify Paving Area. You can continue to add revisions. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. with the description Relocate Door. NOTE After you issue a revision.Unnamed. under Sheets. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You do this by issuing the revision. 9 Click OK. click Add. you prevent further changes to the revision.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. and enter a date. and enter a date for the revision.rvt. double-click A107 . 8 Add another revision row. you can no longer modify it. select Issued. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.

Unnamed. 11 On the Drafting tab. select Seq.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. select Revision Cloud. 13 Click Finish Sketch. double-click A107 . apply Seq. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Project Browser. for Revision. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. select the revision cloud. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. click to add a revision clouds. select Tag ➤ By Category. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. under Sheets (all). Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area.Modify Paving Area. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . in the drawing area. 2 . 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. double-click Level 4. 19 To add tags. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 3 .Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 12 In the drawing area. 10 In the Project Browser.

You do this so that the revision can be changed. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. you edit the titleblock family. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. select the titleblock. For each revision. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. delete the first 3 characters. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. beginning with "D". and rotation) to the revision schedule. clear Issued. 25 Click OK twice. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. for Sequence. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. select Alphabetic. height. Click Options. for Numbering.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Working with Revisions | 369 . ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. 26 In the drawing area.

click Modify. 28 In the alert dialog. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Clear Blank row before data. select Bottom-up. right-click Revision Schedule. Select Outline. and click Properties. and press DELETE.27 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. click Edit Family. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. for Appearance. and drag it above the schedule area. click Load into Projects. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. under Other. click Yes. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 38 In the Reload Family dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. for Build Schedule. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Select Grid lines. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. click Edit. click Yes. 33 Select the schedule header. 34 On the Design Bar. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built.

46 Click OK twice. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. for Heading.. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. select User defined. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. open the titleblock family for editing. under Other. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 45 On the Appearance tab.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Revision Schedule. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. for Formatting. click Edit. select 90° Counterclockwise. When the height property is variable. Working with Revisions | 371 . for Height. enter Rev. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. for Rotation on Sheet. select the revision schedule. With a user-defined height. 40 Select the revision schedule header. and on the Options Bar. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. and click Properties. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously.

51 Save the file. text. 372 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Load into Projects. you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

3 On the Options Bar. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.JPG. under Sheets. for Leader.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Importing Image Files In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . and place it on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Title Sheet. click to add text without a leader. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Importing Image Files | 373 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Text.Title Sheet.rvt. click Training Files. double-click T . and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. click Modify. under Sheets. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.

doc text file in another window. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 6 Select the text. with the new text box still selected. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 11 Save the file. 9 On the Design Bar. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Training File 374 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click Modify. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.

and click Save. and saved as Fixture Schedule. under Sheets. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. for Name. select the document writer.rvt. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Unit 18. Importing Spreadsheets | 375 . type Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 10 On the Design Bar.xls. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 3 In Microsoft Excel. This step has been completed for you. double-click A102 . click Modify. for File name. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. This process may vary from system to system. click File menu ➤ Print. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 12 Save the file.JPG. 5 Click OK.mdi. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. This exercise demonstrates a common method. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files. click Desktop. 4 Under Printer. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.JPG. 1 In the Project Browser.

376 .

Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. The large floor plan. as well as a large lab building. called dependent views. 377 . or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. To effectively document this project.

378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 379 .Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 4 In the Rename View dialog. The dependent view opens. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 6 In the drawing area. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 3 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Rename. enter Level 2 .Aviary. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. under Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. click (Hide Crop Region). confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 .

click Zoom To Fit.Labs. 15 Select the crop region. for Name. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 14 Click in the drawing area. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and click Rename. 11 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and on the Zoom flyout.10 Click in the drawing area. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click OK. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. enter Level 2 .

and on the Zoom flyout. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Modify.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . under Floor Plans. click Matchline. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. click (Hide Crop Region). 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. and click.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Move the cursor left about 16'. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 24 On the Design Bar.

for Line Weight. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. expand Sheets. right-click A101 . for Name. 31 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 385 .Aviary. select 9. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 28 For Line Pattern. enter Level 2 Aviary. and click OK. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. and click Rename. and click OK.Unnamed. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 27 Under Matchline. click Level 2 . under Floor Plans. 33 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. click the Annotation Objects tab. select Double Dash 5/8''.

39 On the Options Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. double-click Level 2. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. for Target view. under Floor Plans. and place the Level 2 . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .35 On the Design Bar.Aviary is selected.Labs dependent view on the sheet. click Modify. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click View Reference. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.Labs. 41 On the Options Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 387 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. for Target view. 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. click Modify.

select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. under Floor Plans. 48 Select the crop region. click the far right control. 47 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 49 If. double-click Level 2 . 388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. after modifying the annotation crop region. right-click.Aviary. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.46 In the Project Browser. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 389 .50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and click Apply Dependent Views. 53 In the Select Views dialog. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 2. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). expand Level 1. and click OK. 54 In the Project Browser. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. click Zoom To Fit. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 51 On the View Control Bar. 52 In the Project Browser. select all views in the list.

right-click South Elevation. 2 In the Project Browser.57 On the Zoom flyout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. The matchline is already placed in the view. click Training Files.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 390 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Zoom To Fit.

enter South Elevation . 11 Select the crop region. right-click South Elevation. cropping the view to the aviary. and click OK. and click Rename. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and drag it toward the center of the view. and click Rename. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 5 In the drawing area. cropping the view to the lab building. 3 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. for Name. select the Crop Region. 7 On the View Control Bar.Left. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog. click (Hide Crop Region).The dependent view opens. for Name. and click OK.Right. expand South Elevation. enter South Elevation . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 391 . right-click Dependent on South Elevation.

enter South Elevation. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click A103 Unnamed. click South Elevation .Left. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.13 On the View Control Bar. click South Elevation . for Name. and click Rename. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region).Right. and drag it onto the sheet. 16 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. under Elevations. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 392 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. and drag it onto the sheet. under Sheets.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 393 .Left is selected. under Elevations. for Target view. click Modify. double-click South Elevation. 28 On the Options Bar. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 25 On the Options Bar.Right. for Target view. click View Reference. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. select Elevation: South Elevation . 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.22 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar.

394 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . NOTE If the view references are not visible.30 On the Design Bar.South Elevation. Select the crop region. and click Activate View. click Modify. under Sheets (all). you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. 31 In the Project Browser. Right-click the view. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. double-click A103 .

Viewing and Rendering 395 .

396 .

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. Daytime rendering of the pool house 397 . you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.

you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. the pad. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and then render a final exterior view. After you create the perspective view. 398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. In this exercise. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. you specify options that define the model environment. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. add trees to the building site. When you complete these changes. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. and create the perspective view that you want to render.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 399

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 401

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 403

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 405.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 405

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 407

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Perspective View on page 409.

Creating a Perspective View
In this exercise, you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

Creating a Perspective View | 409

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point:

Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

The perspective view displays.

410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 Zoom out, and select the crop boundary. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground, as shown. Depending on camera placement, the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site, and adjust the field of vision, as necessary. If the camera is not shown in the view, in the Project Browser, right-click 3D View 1, and click Show Camera. With the camera shown, the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view.

Creating a Perspective View | 411

6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior - Day, and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser, double-click Exterior - Day to open the view, and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.

10 Save the file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 413.

412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating the Exterior Rendering
In this exercise, you specify the time and location settings for the rendering, and render a daytime view of the exterior.

You then duplicate the view, modify render settings, and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Exterior - Day.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 413

Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Rendering Dialog).

You create a location and time for the rendering. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings, see Re-orienting the Project on page 453. 3 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Sun, select Edit/New. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Spring Equinox, and click Rename. 5 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Spring Equinox - Santa Monica, 3pm. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog, under Background, select Sky: Cloudy. You adjust cloud settings as required. In this case, the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. NOTE If a background image is required, export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 8 Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium, and click Render.

414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

9 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model. After the image is rendered, you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open.

10 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog, click Export. 12 In the Save Image dialog:
■ ■ ■

In the left pane, click Desktop. For Files of type, select Portable Network Graphics (*.png). Click Save.

The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 415

add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. and click OK. under Group Options. 22 Using the same method.Flat Round : 60W . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. on the View Control Bar. and click Artificial Lights. under Lighting. enter Pool Lights. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Exterior .Flat Round : 60W . highlight 9 :Sconce Light . under 3D Views. under Group Options. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. click New. under Ungrouped Lights.Flat Round : 60W . 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Night view open.120V. and click Move to Group. enter Pool House Lights. for Scheme. 25 Using the same method. click Render. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .Night. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only. and click OK. click New. verify that Pool Lights is selected.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Night. and click OK.Day.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . 16 With the Exterior . To select a sequential list. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.120V to the Pool Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . under Ungrouped Lights.Day view to Exterior . select the first light. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. add 30 :Sconce Light . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . click OK. for Name. and select the last light. press and hold SHIFT. for Name. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. you duplicate the view and change the settings.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . dialog. right-click Exterior . click Dialog).

Rendering an Interior View on page 417. you change the brightness of the exposure. In this example. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. for Exposure Value. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. and click OK.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. enter 4. Rendering an Interior View | 417 . Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 32 Save the file. 30 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. click Adjust Exposure. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. under Image. After the image is rendered.

Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and finally. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Adding RPC People In this exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. c_Pool_House_in_progress. render the views.

■ (Rotate). 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. select RPC Female : YinYin. 6 Select the figure. and on the Edit toolbar. 5 On the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important. and place the component inside the pool house. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. the person’s line of sight. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. click Component. Adding RPC People | 419 . but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure.

If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 12 Click OK 3 times. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. click Edit/New. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. under Identity Data. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Save the file.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. for Render Appearance Properties. under Parameters. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click (Element Properties). click Edit. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. you can enable this option. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. In order to see the figure’s reflection. select Cast Reflections. click Modify. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. By default. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 421 . you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Camera. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 421. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. under 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK.The perspective view displays. under Extents. 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Section Box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and click Properties. right-click 3D View 1. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering.

8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. select the section box. under Elevations (Building Elevations). double-click Level 1. in addition to the 3D view. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 423 .7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. double-click South. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 11 In the 3D view.

select the section box. 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .12 In the floor plan view. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. size the box as shown. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view.

Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 425. 17 Save the file. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 425 . To create a daytime view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. and curtain walls. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. doors that contain windows or glass. and render the interior view.

c_Pool_House_in_progress.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Click Artificial Lights. under 3D Views.Night. select Interior: Artificial only. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering.rvt. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you turn them off for this scene. and click OK. for Setting. clear Pool Lights. and click OK. for Scheme. 2 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. 4 In the Rendering dialog. 7 Under Quality. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. select Draft. under Lighting. right-click 3D View 1. After these settings are established. and click Rename. 3 On the View Control Bar. enter Interior . You can specify a lower quality. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option.

3pm. and click Render. click Copy To Custom. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. for Scheme.Day. The preset schemes are read-only.9 Close the Rendering dialog. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. select Edit. in order to turn on daylight portals. For sunlit interiors. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. select Curtain Walls.Santa Monica. (Show Rendering Dialog). You create a view for the interior during the day. select Interior: Sun only. In this case. the daylight portals can be turned on. select Spring Equinox . 13 In the Rendering dialog. select Region. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. right-click Interior . Creating the Interior Rendering | 427 . 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. for Sun. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. 17 In the Rendering dialog. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. you must create a custom setting.Night. click 14 For Setting. and click OK. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. For more information on daylight portals. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. for Daylight Portal Options. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. but the space will receive standard daylighting. By default they are turned off. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

18 In the Rendering dialog. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. For Saturation. and on the Options Bar. click Show the model. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Click OK. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. click Adjust Exposure. click Properties). select the column on the right. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. enter 10. In the next steps. enter 1. under Image. 20 In the Rendering dialog. and close the Rendering dialog. (Element 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. and on the Options Bar. select Based on wood grain. As size and DPI are increased. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. For Amount. for Setting. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. add a bump map to create texture. 24 In the Materials dialog. For Width. Click OK. enter 5''. You change the varnish setting. select Unfinished. for Resolution. click OK.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. For Rotate. Creating the Interior Rendering | 429 . select Printer. the render time increases significantly. 30 In the drawing area. and click Render. clear Region. 23 With the column still selected. click the dimensions for Size. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select Scale (locked proportions). enter 90. 32 In the Rendering dialog. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. 28 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 29 In the Rendering dialog. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled.6. select High. select Wood. and click OK. under Output Settings. select the crop boundary. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. For Bump.

Usually. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. or section view. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. but you can also define it in a 3D. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. The walkthrough path is a spline. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. independent of the Revit Architecture software. elevation.The rendered image displays.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Perspective is selected. right-click in the Design Bar. click Walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. and ends in the far corner of the living room. Creating a Walkthrough | 431 . click Training Files. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Townhouse. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. on the Options Bar. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and double-click 1st Floor. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough.rvt. expand Views (all). 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. proceeds through the dining room.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. and change unit formats as desired. and click the tab in the context menu. If you prefer to use metric values.

432 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Finish. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.

select the crop boundary. on the Options Bar. for Frame. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 11 Under Change.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 12 On the View menu. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 16''. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. and click OK. If it is not. and for Height. and select the crop boundary. click the dimensions for Size. 17 Click . click Edit Walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough | 433 . 16 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 1. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. verify that Field of view is selected. for Width. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 9''. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 14 Click .

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 434. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. clear Far Clip Active. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. c_Townhouse. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. under Extents.rvt.The walkthrough plays. click (Element Properties). proceed to the next exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. under Floor Plans. press ESC. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. double-click 1st Floor. 434 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 On the Options Bar. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser.

You can move any camera target or key frame position. select Path.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. for Controls. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 6 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the location shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 435 . 7 Click the third key frame position.

click Edit Walkthrough. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. select <Shading>. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. shading with edges. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. hidden line. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. under Output Length. 9 To play the walkthrough. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 436 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 15. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or rendering. double-click Walkthrough 1. on the Options Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. specifying the number of frames. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. Recording the Walkthrough on page 436. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. When you export the walkthrough. for Compressor. under Walkthroughs. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. shading. and click Save. and click OK. The walkthrough is recorded. reducing the size of the image. 3 Under Format. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. for Frames/sec. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. . c_Townhouse. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. for Model Graphics Style. If you are unsure of what option to use.rvt.

you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. More specifically. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. 437 . In this tutorial. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.

Creating a Solar Study . The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. as 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Training Files. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. (SteeringWheels). A 3D view is created. and double-click 01 Entry.rvt. 4 On the View toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Camera. click shown. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Courtyard View In this exercise. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.

and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 8 In the Rename View dialog.Courtyard View. enter Solar Study . and click Rename.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 439. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Save As. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the view boundary to select it.5 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. as shown. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 439 . under Floor Plans. if necessary. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. 9 On the File menu. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 3 On the Design Bar. right-click 3D View 1. click Section. click Modify. double-click 01 Entry. you create a section cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Project Browser.

click . (SteeringWheels). Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. as shown. 8 In the Rename View dialog. expand Sections. 11 On the SteeringWheel. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 6 To view the section. click Modify. click Modify. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. right-click Section 1. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 13 On the Design Bar. and click Rename.5 On the Design Bar. double-click the section head. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click 10 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. 7 In the Project Browser.

14 In the Project Browser. click Callout. do not display many elements in 3D. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. including the house. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 16 On the View Control Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Save. then select Medium. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 18 On the File menu. right-click {3D}. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. In some cases. 17 To hide the section box. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. click . 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 441. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. you create a plan cutaway view. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 441 . such as floor plans and ceiling plans.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 15 In the Rename View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click Rename. and click OK. then Fine. as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Typical plan views. and click Rename. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. clear Section Boxes.

click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 15 Select the Roof. 16 On the View Control Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. as shown. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. so you can see into the building from the top. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area.8 On the View toolbar.

click Save. right-click {3D}. and click OK. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. and click Rename. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 On the File menu. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 443 . 20 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 19 In the Rename View dialog. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson.17 On the View Control Bar.

expand Views (all). . you specify the location. 4 For Sun Position. 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study.Creating Solar Studies . and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. Los Angeles. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. For the Single-Day solar study. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. MA. single-day. click click OK. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For the Multi-Day solar study. For this study. date. 10 Under Place.Boston. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . CA. for City. Click the Single-Day tab. you specify the location. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. click . USA is selected. and click OK. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. or multi-day solar study. select Los Angeles.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click .Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. You can create a still. and click Duplicate. USA. and time. and time range. date range. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. enter Summer Solstice. 3 Select Cast Shadows. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. leave the slider at 50. expand 3D Views. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation.

Clear Ground Plane at Level. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 14 In this case. select December 22. enter 10 and press ENTER. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. select June 22. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ For Time Interval. enter 20 and press ENTER. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 2008. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. select Winter Solstice. under Frame. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Under Frame. for Sun Position. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 445 . on the Single-Day tab. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. click . verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. confirm that Summer Solstice. and click OK. Los Angeles. 2 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles. For Time Range. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. Los Angeles is selected. 2008. 16 In the Name dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 19 On the File menu. click OK. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click Duplicate. 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. for Date. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Save. enter Winter Solstice. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 445.

■ To display the previous sequential frame. click To play the animation from start to finish. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. select Summer Solstice. The solar study animation plays. double-click 01 Entry. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. under Floor Plans. Los Angeles. . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. approximately as shown. . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click . click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. . click To display the next sequential frame. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. for Sun Position. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. on the Single-Day tab. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click Text. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar.■ To display the next key frame.

■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. approximately as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. click Lines. Click and enter Dining. as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI | 447 . Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. expand 3D Views. as shown. On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 8 For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. click . 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

Los Angeles. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. 14 Click outside of the section box. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 12 In the drawing area. under Output Length. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. 11 To display the section box. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. 15 To hide the section box. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. select Frame Range. and click OK. select Section Boxes. clear Section Boxes. and enter 5 to 50. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select the section box. on the Single-Day tab. ■ For Frames per second. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. if necessary. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. click OK. select Summer Solstice.

NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. For Frames per second. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. or frame. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. you open each image. 3 For Sun Position. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. for Model Graphics Style. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . To view the animation. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and enter 5 to 10. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. To maintain the proportions of the frame.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select AVI Files. select Winter Solstice. verify that Hidden Line is selected. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. For Files of Type. on the Single-Day tab. click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 449. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 450 in the first field (width).Los Angeles. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click . select Frame Range. Exporting a Study as PNG | 449 . and click OK. verify that the value is set to 15. for Compressor. Under Format. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.■ ■ Under Format. For File Name. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. for Model Graphics Style. of the animation separately. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Output Length. For Dimensions. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Click OK.

you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.Los Angeles. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. or any single-frame format. select PNG. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. as shown: 9 On the File menu. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. or GIF. click Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. such as JPEG. BMP. In this example. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. 8 Click Save. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. enter 450 in the first field (width). the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. depending on the Frame Range.■ For Dimensions. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. under 3D Views. click the Desktop icon. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Click OK. TIFF. For File name. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. For Files of Type.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 451 .

select One week. 12 In the Name dialog. 5 Select the roof. clear Section Boxes.Los Angeles . On the Annotation Categories tab.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 8 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click Duplicate. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. click OK. For Time.Week Interval.Boston. USA. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. MA. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . For Time Interval. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. specify 2:00 pm. for Sun Position. and click OK. for File name enter 2pm . and on the View Control Bar. click the Multi-Day tab. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off.West or North .15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 17 On the View Control Bar. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. and click Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. model views. When you mirror a project. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. under Floor Plans. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. such as East . Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry.South. you mirror all model elements. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). and annotations in non-drafting views. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Click the Desktop icon. Re-orienting the Project | 453 . for File Name. and click OK. click OK. In the Length/Format dialog. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. for Compressor. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.

4 In the Mirror Project dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click OK. Then.West. select the roof. 5 In the warning dialog. In this exercise. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. For additional information. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. 2 In the drawing area. and click OK. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view.West axis. under 3D Views. 6 On the Standard toolbar. The project is mirrored along the East . you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. right-click. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select East .

click the Still tab. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For example. click . and click OK. click . and click OK. 5 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. select Summer Solstice. click . select Cast Shadows. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click Apply. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 11 For Sun Position. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. specify 11:00 AM for time. 12 Under Date and Time. Orienting to True North | 455 . on the Still tab. 10 Under Date and Time. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 For Sun Position. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. and select Winter Solstice.

17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 15 For Sun Position. 456 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. and click OK. When a project is started. 18 In the Project Browser. right click 01 Entry. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. double-click 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. 19 In the Project Browser. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Orientation.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. click OK. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. select True North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. click . and select Winter Solstice. the view settings must be set for True North. and click OK. This process establishes the view setting to True North. and click Properties. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. click the Still tab. 14 On the View Control Bar.

The floor plan rotates in the view. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. as shown. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction. Orienting to True North | 457 . click toward the top of the screen.

View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. click . and click Element Properties. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click Rename. for Orientation. select True North. enter True North Orientation. and click OK. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 28 In the Project Browser. right-click. select Summer Solstice. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Properties. 32 On the View Control Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Project North. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. select True North Orientation. 458 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . right-click 01 Entry. and click OK. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. 25 In the Project Browser.23 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. and click Apply. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. right-click 01 Entry. and click OK. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. for Orientation. right-click. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. under 3D Views. 27 In the Rename View dialog. 33 For Sun Position. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. for Compressor. For File Name. click the Single-Day tab. enter 600 in the first field. Click Save. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. click Summer Solstice. click the Desktop icon.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. under Format. click OK. for Dimensions. For Files of Type. verify that AVI Files is selected. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. In the Length/Format dialog. Click OK. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Los Angeles. Orienting to True North | 459 . and click OK. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically.

and exporting it as a JPEG image. select Medium. capturing it. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. (Show Rendering Dialog).rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Render. for Scheme. In this exercise. Under Lighting. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397 for additional information on rendering. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. select Edit/New. Rendered views do not have this limitation. Since a rendered image is temporary. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. select Winter Solstice. under Settings. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For Sun. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. for Date and Time. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select 12/22. under 3D Views. for Setting. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. 460 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Interior: Sun only. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. 2 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate. under Quality.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. and 2:00 PM. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view.

8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. and click Save. click Save to Project. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. and click OK. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 461 . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Export. enter living area_winter solstice. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Desktop. NOTE Rendered views are temporary.6 In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type.

462 .

You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. advanced model graphics. sections. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. Whether the audience is the general contractor. a consultant. They include rendering. linework. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. Co-house. type. Other tools in the software. length. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. you explore the stylistic approach. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397. elevations. 463 . For the realistic approach.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. an outside reviewer. and details. Using the pre-built building model. and section boxes. In this tutorial. however. In this series of exercises. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. or the client. you can choose between realism and stylistics. When organizing presentation graphics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique.

464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a copy of the plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a presentation floor plan.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. and click Rename. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. right-click 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 465 . 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Cnst. Cnst.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and other annotations in this view.TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 11 In the Save As directory. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. dimensions. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and Up Arrow. click in the drawing area. and click Save. sections. click the Scale control and select 1/8" = 1’ 0". 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. this represents the view getting smaller. navigate to the folder of your choice. click the Annotation Categories tab. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. exit the menu. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. and clear DOWN Text. Down Arrow. elevations. 8 Click OK. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 466. UP Text. expand the Stairs category. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. No annotations display in the view. name the project i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 Under Visibility.

2 On the View Control Bar. specify 35. select Boston. select Sun and Shadow Settings. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. MA. click . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. ■ For Contrast. At that place. 3 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off). For Sun Position. the darker the shadows. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. select Cast Shadows. modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 7 For Place. on the Still tab. click . The higher the number. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 467 . The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click OK. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. you can create. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 6 Under Settings. Within a project. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Time and Place. select By Date. click the Place tab. double-click it in the Project Browser. 9 For City.rvt. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

clear Ground Plane at Level. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and select 1st Flr. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. however. and click OK. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Settings. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.NOTE For this step. 1:00 PM. 12 Click OK. click (Shadows On). If you select a different city. . This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. for Sun Position. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. Cnst. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can select any city. specify 10/27. click OK. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. click OK. for Date and Time.

select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK.19 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 469 . you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 4 In the Views dialog. right-click the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. The viewport displays at the cursor. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click View. click Add View. and click to place it. select Arch D 36 x 24 Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 469.

select No.6 On the Design Bar. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click . 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. enter Presentation. To accomplish this. Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. for Show Title. click Duplicate. click OK. For this analytique. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Name dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and notice the view title. click Modify. under Graphics. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.

click . Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. fill properties.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and click Activate View. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. If necessary. 18 On the Options Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 471 . and select Chain. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. When you finish drawing the chain. click . 17 In the Type Selector. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 20 On the Options Bar. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. and the boundary of the region. click Filled Region. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. select Invisible lines.

and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. select Solid fill. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 25 In the Name dialog. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 472. click Edit/New. under Name. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click .22 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Graphics. scroll down. for Sheet Name. 30 On the Design Bar. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click View Properties. click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Region Properties. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. enter Presentation. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. enter Solid Black. click Duplicate. and click Deactivate View. under Identity Data.

Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 473 .rvt. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. right-click South.

474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Shadows Off). 18 For Time. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Pattern Overrides. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. By changing the angle of the sun.2 In the Project Browser. 13 For Contrast. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Under Shadow. click . you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 35. Time and Place. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. expand the Doors category. and click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. on the Model Categories tab. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click in the Walls row. under Visibility. under Settings. click Duplicate. and clear Elevation Swing. clear Visible. exit the menu. click OK. specify 2:30 PM. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. scroll up. select By Date. and click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Rename. click Override. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. right-click Copy of South. 9 Click OK. and click OK. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. enter Presentation South Elevation. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Visibility. under Elevations. 14 For Sun Position. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 11 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Name dialog. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. select Cast Shadows. click in the drawing area.

Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 475 . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).rvt. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Add View. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. double-click A106 . you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 475. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Presentation.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays.The viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 477 . click Modify. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 477. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 7 On the Design Bar.

4 Add the section shown below. Adjust the controls to modify the extents.0". 3 On the Options Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 1st Flr. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.rvt. click Section. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. under Floor Plans. for Scale. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Cnst. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). select 1/8" = 1'. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. select 1/8" = 1'. this view needs to be rotated 180°. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Callout 1). To accomplish this. To fit correctly in the analytique. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. for Scale. as shown.0". and double-click Section 2. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view.Section 2 is added to the building model. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 479 .

click Override. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click in the Walls row. expand the Doors category. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 17 Under Visibility. scroll up. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. click the Model Categories tab. 12 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 2. right-click Callout of Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. clear Visible.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Under Visibility. 10 In the Project Browser. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls.

Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. When you select the crop region. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 22 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click The crop regions no longer display. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 481 . The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 482. (Hide Crop Region).

Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. specify 35. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 3 On the View Control Bar. double-click Presentation Section 2. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). in the Project Browser. Click Apply. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Duplicate. In addition. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section.rvt. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. specify the following: Under Shadow. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. In the steps that follow. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 6 In the Name dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. For Contrast. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. and click OK. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. click . ■ For Sun Position. The shadows do not offer much contrast.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Click OK. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 483 . was added to this training file for training purposes. click OK. select Directly. Select Relative to View. for Silhouette style. and click OK. NOTE The line style. select Silhouette Edges. specify 135°. For Azimuth. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 484. click (Shadows On). specify 70°. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Silhouette Edges. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. For Altitude. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Presentation. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sheets (all). click Add View.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view. and click Add View to Sheet. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2. double-click A106 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog.

you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. The view title no longer displays. 6 On the Design Bar. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. select Viewport : Presentation. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation.5 In the Type Selector. To rotate an object. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. click Modify. you click to specify the start radius. and press Enter. double-click Section 2. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 485 . and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Using a clock as a reference. The section needs to be rotated 180°. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. click (Rotate).

The callout rotates 180°. under Sheets (all). Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click A106 .Presentation. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

Working with a Presentation View Template | 487 . and drag it up and to the left as shown. 15 On the Design Bar.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 487. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. After applying the view template to a new section view. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. right-click Copy of Section 1. 4 In the View Templates dialog. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK.rvt. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation Section 1. you can simply apply the presentation view template. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. double-click Presentation Section 2. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation. and click OK. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Section 1. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 7 In the Rename View dialog.

11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and elevation swings no longer display. for Rotation on Sheet. annotations. select Presentation. double-click A106 . and click OK. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select 90° Counterclockwise.Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. The furniture. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. Working with a Presentation View Template | 489 . 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 15 Right-click the viewport. and click OK. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. select Viewport : Presentation. 18 Right-click the viewport. under Names. and click Add View to Sheet. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add View. lighting fixtures. under Graphics.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 490. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. double-click Section 1. Working in a Callout Analytique | 491 . 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout. as shown.rvt. right-click Callout of Section 1.

under Extents. 8 Right-click. as shown. clear Annotation Crop. double-click Presentation Callout. 7 Select the crop region. 6 In the Project Browser. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. clear Crop Region Visible. enter Presentation Callout. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. and click OK. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1).5 In the Rename View dialog.

select Viewport : Presentation. Working in a Callout Analytique | 493 . under Sheets (all).Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click Add View. click Modify. select Custom. specify 22. select Section: Presentation Callout. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. For Scale Value 1. double-click A106 .Presentation. Click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Activate View.

When finished. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. In the steps that follow. 23 On the Design Bar. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. click Filled Region. click Edit/New. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .19 Right-click the callout presentation view. double-click Presentation Callout. activate the viewport. under Sections (Callout 1). Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. and make adjustments as necessary. and move it to the position shown below. and click Deactivate View. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport.

28 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. on the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click .Presentation. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. double-click A106 .25 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. and click OK 3 times. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Solid fill. for Fill Pattern. Working in a Callout Analytique | 495 . You do not have to replicate the image exactly.

click Finish Sketch. click (Show Crop Region). and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. and sketch the rectangle shown below.31 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the crop region. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.35 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 497. and click Deactivate View. click (Hide Crop Region). You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 497 . 37 Click File menu ➤ Save.

double-click Isometric. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. click the Scale control. 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off).rvt. 5 On the View Control Bar. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and apply shadows to the views. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and click 1" = 20'-0". Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under 3D Views. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise.

For Azimuth. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. double-click Isometric 2. For Sun Position. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. select Cast Shadows. For Contrast. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 14 In the Project Browser. select Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 15 In the Rename View dialog. under Extents. select Section Box. and click Rename. under 3D Views. and click OK. select Directly. under 3D Views. for Silhouette style. and click OK. and click OK. Select Relative to View. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. enter Isometric 1.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. click . Select Ground Plane at Level. specify 35. under 3D Views. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Isometric. in the list. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 499 . 13 In the Project Browser. Cnst. click Duplicate. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. specify 45°. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A section box displays around the building model. Click OK. Select 1st Flr. and click Rename. For Altitude. specify 135°. under 3D Views. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Isometric 1. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

You can use this to rotate the section box.19 Select the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. as shown. Grips display on each face of the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. When you are finished. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. double-click Isometric 3. click Modify on the Design Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. When you are finished. and click Rename. 22 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. 25 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. 23 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Isometric 2. 27 Select the section box. clear Section Boxes. right-click Isometric 2. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the stairs and railings may display. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. The section box no longer displays. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 501 . make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. under 3D Views. If desired. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 29 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. you can adjust the plane location. and click OK. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. enter Isometric 3. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 21 In the Project Browser.

31 In the Project Browser. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure.Presentation. under 3D Views. The filled region partially covers the view. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. 32 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation.Next. double-click A106 . 33 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under Sheets (all). drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. In the Type Selector. In the Type Selector.

and click Activate View. This will make it easier to draw lines. 42 Using the drawing tools. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 36 On the Design Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 40 Click OK twice. The image below shows the redrawn lines. click Edit/New. select Concrete. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 35 Select the poche filled region. On the Options Bar. 39 For Background. for Fill Patterns.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Lines. 41 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 503 . click Region Properties. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. select Transparent.

50 Proceed with the next exercise.43 On the Design Bar. 46 Click OK twice. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. select Solid fill. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish Sketch. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 505. 47 On the Design Bar. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Fill Pattern. click Edit/New. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Deactivate View.

a cutaway perspective view. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Camera. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you add it to the presentation sheet. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. double-click 1st Flr. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. under Floor Plans. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 505 . then you specify the eye direction and range. The view opens immediately. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create the final view for the analytique.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Cnst.

select Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. For Sun Position. specify the following: Under Shadow. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. specify 35. For Contrast. for Silhouette style. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. for Name. and click OK. 506 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click .4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. and click OK.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 507 . 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. A section box now cuts through the building model. Grips display on each plane of the section box. select Section Box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. under Extents.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.14 Select the crop region. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click A106 . 18 On the View Control Bar. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. In the Type Selector. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. under Sheets (all). 21 In the Project Browser. 508 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter 6 1/2". select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. click Size. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Change. On the Annotation Categories tab. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. select Scale (locked proportions).Presentation. clear Section Boxes. 19 To hide the section box. for Width. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 17 Under Model Crop Size. you must specify the actual size of the image. and click OK.

click Edit/New. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A106 . 12 In the Element Properties dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.Presentation sheet is not the active view. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. select Text : Title. enter Description. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. enter Title. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. Annotating the Analytique | 509 . and click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.rvt. double-click it in the Project Browser. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Text. specify a text size of 1/4". click Text. specify a text size of 1 1/2". click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique on page 509. select the same font as the title. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog. select a font. click Duplicate.

17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the Design Bar. 510 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Importing and Exporting 511 .

512 .

513 .Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. such as walls. you create a small building from the front mass form. you can easily add detail with Revit components. and roofs. curtain walls. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. that compose the building. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. In this tutorial. Once the model has been imported. After you import the SketchUp model.

select All. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. For Import units. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. or select from a list. click the Massing tab. 10 In the Name dialog. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select SketchUp Files. and click Save. click Browse. click OK. click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog. you create a Revit Architecture project. and not in the library. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. under Template file. right-click in the Design Bar.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. For Layers. for File name. Double-click the Common folder. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 6 In the Save As dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Preserve. and open Imperial\Templates\default. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. click Training Files. visible elements. enter Import SketchUp. and click OK. For Files of type.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. click OK. Click the Sketchup file. For Colors. select Auto-Detect. buildings.skp. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. enter SketchUp Model. ■ 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. such as walls. click Finish Mass. Level 1 is the only choice. and roofs. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. For Place at level. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. click . curtain walls. ■ ■ For Positioning. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from.Center. 17 In the warning dialog. select Level 1. depending on the complexity of the project. 16 On the Design Bar. In a new project.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. Click Open. click the Close button. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. select Manual . ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 515 . 14 On the View toolbar.

and on the View Control Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. select the face so that it highlights in red. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. for Level. curtain walls. verify Level 2 is selected. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . such as walls. verify Basic Roof: Generic . After you create the building from the mass faces. that compose the building. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.18 Proceed to the next exercise.12'' displays. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. click Roof by Face. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and roofs. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 516. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project.

(It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. A roof is created from the mass face. To see the new roof. click Create Roof. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 9 On the Options Bar. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 6 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create Roof. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.) to turn off mass visibility in the view.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. on the View toolbar. click to display masses. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create Roof.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 12 On the Design Bar. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face.

Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. for Loc Line. select Core Face: Exterior. click Wall by Face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . verify Basic Wall: Generic . 23 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses.15 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click Modify to end the command. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.8'' displays. click roofs that you created. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 22 In the Type Selector.

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. verify Curtain System: 5' x 10' displays. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view only the walls and roofs. click Curtain System by Face. 28 In the Type Selector.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. 31 Using the same technique.30 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click Create System.

TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Wall by Face. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Curtain System. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. and select it. and on the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below.35 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. 522 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and on the Options Bar. click Create System. click Roof by Face.

45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. and select the mass face shown below. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 523 .Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. click Camera. Below the right corner of the view. click to view the building that you have created. double-click Level 1. 42 On the View toolbar. specify a point to place the camera. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser.

roofs. click your building in the view. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. specify a point for the camera target. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. Click the frame to display its grips. The perspective view created by the camera displays. 524 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . to view only the walls. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. as shown. 48 On the View toolbar.

Under Grid 1 Pattern. click . for Justification. for Justification. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 525 . 50 On the Options Bar. and select the left curtain system in the view. click Modify.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. select Center. select Center. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click OK.

57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. verify Single-Flush: 36'' x 84'' displays. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move the roof edges as shown below. 63 In the Type Selector. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 526 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and click Cancel to end the command. 56 In the Project Browser. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 55 Right-click. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 59 On the View toolbar. click Door. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 527 .

528 .

Using Advanced Features 529 .

530 .

panel. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. to resize the system. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Like windows. 531 .Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. and they are not windows. you create a curtain system using the wall command. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. and mullions. This affects the entire curtain system. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you need to select a panel. For example. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you select the grid. grid lines. you need to change the length of the wall. To switch panel types. or you can use a specific curtain system command. Unlike windows. Like walls. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. and you can change these elements individually. To change grids.

Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_Curtain_Walls. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. click Training Files. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. and double-click Ground Floor. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Wall.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 4 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

8 In the Project Browser. and double-click Southeast Isometric. Creating an Entrance | 533 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.

select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. enter 4'0". and room bounding. using curtain grids. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. For Top Offset. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. and click (Properties). 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel.11 Select the curtain system. top and base attachments. Click OK. top constraint. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 4'0" above the ground floor level line. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. click Curtain Grid. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Elevation. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation.a. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 23 Place another grid 5'0" above the first grid. and click Rename. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 18 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1 . under Floor Plans. and click OK. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.

SIXTH FLOOR.24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. click Modify. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. Click to create a vertical grid. and click OK. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. FIFTH FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. while pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. one larger than the other. 25 On the Design Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 26 While pressing CTRL.

you add a doorway to the curtain system. click Modify. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then select the segment above it. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Creating an Entrance | 537 . 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Next. Click to place another grid line. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. and on the Options Bar. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. click Add or Remove Segments. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. Instead of using the Door command. The segment line style changes to dashed.32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line.

42 Place dimensions as shown. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 38 Using the same method. click Curtain Grid. 39 On the Design Bar. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select One Segment. and lock them. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown.The two segments are removed.

45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 4'0" above the ground floor. Do not click between the 6-foot panels. Use the following image as a guide. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. click in any white space to exit the editor. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid).TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. You now have two 6-foot wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 43 Delete the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. Creating an Entrance | 539 . To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids.

51 Select the left 6-foot panel. under Elevations. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. not as curtain panels. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 56 In the Project Browser. They are part of the curtain panel category. You will have to press TAB to highlight it.rfa. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. and open Imperial\Families\Doors\Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. double-click Entrance Elevation. . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. The panel changes to a double door. Now. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 57 On the View Control Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel.Next. 52 On the Type Selector. on the new curtain system you added. you replace the 2 larger 6-foot panels with curtain system doors. click Training Files. This changes the graphics style of the Next. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. click view. 54 On the Design Bar. 55 In the Project Browser. These panels schedule as doors. click Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. and click Wireframe. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

click . 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. The glazed panels display in blue. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel.60 On the Type Selector. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. and the solid panels display in white. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 541 . 63 Click OK twice. 61 With the panel still selected. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click System Panel : Solid. 65 On the View Control Bar.

so you remove them next. 10 Delete the mullions below them. there are a few that you do not want.68 On the File menu. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Save As. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 4'0" above the ground floor. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. however. select Grid Line Segment. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. click Mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. Name the file i_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. select Entire Grid Line. clickModify. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 2 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. select All Empty Segments.

14 Click the top mullion control. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Two mullion join controls display. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. You are going to change some mullion joins. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 543 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion.

click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 17 Save the file. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. Finally. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 15 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Finally. you can also right-click. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. under Floor Plans. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed.The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. click Modify. you add a curtain system using the wall command. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 5 Click .

For Top Offset. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Click OK. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall.6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 545 . enter 4'0". (Arc passing through three points). 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. for Top Constraint.

click Curtain Grid. and then sixteenths. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Divide the halves into quarters. 14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. You are going to use one of these snaps points. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Next. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. eighths. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. you place grids on the system. double-click East. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Next.16 On the Design Bar. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.12" . Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. select the bottom layer of panels. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. click Modify. to filter out all 19 Save the file. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 547 . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you change some panels in the system. 18 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Generic .

1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Curtain Wall Panel.rft. 3 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines, and on the Options Bar, for Depth, enter 4". 6 On the Options Bar, click .

7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection.

8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 9 Select the extrusion, and click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory, select Glass, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines. 12 On the Options Bar, clear Chain, and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. .

548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the family as Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa family. 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fourth floor panels are selected. 21 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Panel - Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 23 Right-click, and click Change Walls Orientation. 24 On the View toolbar, click 25 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.

27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fifth floor panels are selected. 29 In the Type Selector, select System Panel - Solid. All the panels change to the solid panel.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 549

The finished arc wall should look like the following image.

30 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel
In this exercise, you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel, except at the GROUND FLOOR level.

For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.

550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Profile.rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog, for Profile Usage, select Mullion, and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 9 On the Options Bar:

Click

(Polygon). , and select it.

If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar, click
■ ■

For Sides, enter 8. Select Radius, and enter 2" for the radius.

10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location.

11 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 13 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Fine, and click OK. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Cylinder Mullion - detail.rfa. 17 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 551

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Select the detail component, and click Visibility. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Coarse and Medium, and click OK. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.rfa. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.rfa family. After the new profile is loaded, it can be added as a mullion type. 27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 28 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels).

29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 31 Click .

32 In the Element Properties dialog, select Circular Mullion for Family. 33 Click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name, and click OK. 36 Under Construction, for Profile, select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 37 Click OK twice. 38 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 40 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

You have placed more mullions than you want, so you remove the unwanted ones. 41 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc, right-click, and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 43 Press DELETE.

44 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions, as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. In this lesson, you learned to create a curved curtain system, make custom curtain panels and mullions, and then apply those custom elements to the system.

Additional Curtain Systems
In this lesson, you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system, a storefront system, and a ruled curtain system.

Additional Curtain Systems | 553

Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.

7 On the Design Bar, click Roof Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Family, select System Family: Sloped Glazing. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level, enter 2' 0". Click OK.

554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight.

13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 14 On the Options Bar, select Entire Grid Line. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system.

Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.

Storefront System | 555

You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar, select Unconnected for Height, and enter 8' 0". 6 Start the wall 4' 0" from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.

7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.

556 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

The curtain wall cuts the original wall.

8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 34' 0", and press ENTER. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.

The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how the grid layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 12 Select the storefront wall, and click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. For this wall, the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing, and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 5' 0". This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 5’ 0". The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance, and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 8'0". This means that the panel heights will be exactly 8', even if the wall height changes. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters, click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading, you find Number, Justification, Angle, and Offset. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, the Number

Storefront System | 557

is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning, center, or end. By setting the Angle value, you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. For more information about these curtain wall parameters, see the Revit Architecture help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 15. 16 Click OK.

17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 18 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 19 Select a curtain grid.

20 Save the file. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. In this exercise, you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout.

Curtain System by Lines
In this exercise, you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise.

558 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab, making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

6 Click the highlighted line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level, and highlight the model line.

Curtain System by Lines | 559

8 Select the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Select the panel, and click .

Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created a ruled curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.

560 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps, place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. Finally, you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 16 In the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system, and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system, embed a curtain system inside another wall, and define a ruled curtain system.

Curtain System by Lines | 561

562

Roofs

15
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, mansard, and low sloped roofs. In this lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this exercise, you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.

In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you create.

Creating Roofs

Creating an Extruded Roof

You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

Training File

Click File menu ➤ Open.

563

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.

564 | Chapter 15 Roofs

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and so on). click the blue square on the witness line.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 565 . centerline. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Lines. sketch the roof profile.Next. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. select Chain.

press TAB. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 17 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and then select the exterior face of the wall. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Creating an Extruded Roof | 567 . press CTRL. click Modify. 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Next. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. expand Sections (Type 1). and double-click Section 1. expand Views (all). 19 On the Tools toolbar. and select the second wall. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click model. click Attach for Top/Base. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 568.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.

the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. 5 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. verify that Defines slope is selected. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 569 . you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.rvt. i_Roofs. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. and double-click Garage Roof. sketch the roof footprint. and click Yes. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.

570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify. under Dimensions. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. and on the Options Bar. Next. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 11 Press CTRL. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 571. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click the model. 14 When you see the informational dialog. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 15 On the View toolbar. By default. select both slope definition lines. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. clear Defines slope. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. click Pick Walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. and double-click Level 3. sketch the chimney opening. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 571 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. Next. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. clear Defines slope. 6 Click to select all the walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. i_Roofs.rvt. When you complete the roof.

select Defines Slope. click Lines. add new slope lines to the roof. 9 Using automatic snaps. 10 On the View menu.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. Next. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. select Defines Slope. 15 On the Options bar. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 573. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. select Defines slope. click Lines.19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. 7 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Next. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. close the roof sketch. and click (Pick Lines). 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 573 . Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.rvt. i_Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. clear Defines Slope.

14 Under Constraints. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof Properties. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Next. Next. raise the roof 2' above the current level. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 11 To trim the first line segment. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. using the following illustration for guidance. 10 On the Options Bar. select the left vertical slope definition line. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and click OK. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. click Finish Roof. 9 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend).

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Modify.16 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 575 . 22 Using the same method that you used previously. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click (SteeringWheels). 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar.

you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.rvt. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 576.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. i_Roofs. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Next.

3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. expand Floor Plans. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click (Trim/Extend). you add a slope-defining line. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. select the left vertical roof line. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click Pick Walls. Next.1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. Next. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 577 . 9 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 10 To trim the first line segment. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 4 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. clear Defines Slope. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. expand Views (all). and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls.

3 On the Options Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Floor Plans. 16 Under Constraints. click Modify. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click Roof Properties. 1 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. and double-click Level 2. and click OK. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER.rvt. expand 3D Views. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. i_Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 19 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and double-click 3D. select Defines slope. 13 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

To help locate the position of each split. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Next. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Slope Arrow. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.5 On the View menu.15 to add the second slope arrow. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Before you can add slope arrows. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 579 . add two new slope arrows. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click (Pick Lines). click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. click Split Walls and Lines. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 9 On the Tools menu. you need to add two reference planes. 7 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. Next. click Ref Plane. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. i_Roofs. select both slope arrows. The eave lines display with a dimension. click Modify. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. When aligning eaves. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Garage Roof. select Defines Slope. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 580. enter 12'' for Rise/12". and click 19 Under Constraints. 5 On the Options Bar. When you sketch a hip roof. When eave heights differ. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 20 Under Dimensions. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. expand Views (all). you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. click Align Eaves. 18 Press CTRL.rvt. select Slope for Specify. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. and click OK. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 1 In the Project Browser. (Properties). you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 6'' for Rise/12".Begin the tail at the right reference plane. (Properties). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. the adjacent eave heights must align. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. under Dimensions. on the Options Bar. and then click OK. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model.

you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Creating a Mansard Roof | 581 . 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 13 On the View toolbar.Next. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 14 If you want to save your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 581. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.rvt. select a method to align the eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. on the File menu. click Training Files. click Finish Roof. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave.

click Modify. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and double-click Level 3. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. (Properties). under Constraints. expand Elevations. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Project Browser.1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Next. click Lines. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all). select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 3 Select the roof and. and double-click North. expand Floor Plans. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 6 On the View toolbar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click mansard roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 584. click . 20 Proceed to the next exercise.10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. 17 On the View toolbar. and select the remaining three lines. click (Pick Lines). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 3'' for Rise/12". Creating a Mansard Roof | 583 . click Save As. click Finish Roof. and then select Defines slope. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. press TAB. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. on the File menu.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. After you add the roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Design Bar. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . double-click Roof. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. you add a roof to a building shell. under Floor Plans.rvt.

6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click (Trim/Extend). and that Overhang is 0' 0''. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 5 In the drawing area. verify that Defines slope is not selected.4 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Tools toolbar. Because the walls are not continuous. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click the section head to open the section view.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.Insulation on Metal Deck . Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . for Type. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. select Steel Truss . and click OK. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof.EPDM.

you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. double-click Roof. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. under Floor Plans. click (Draw Split Lines). You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 587 . In the next steps. 18 Move the cursor down.The roof has been created. and click to select it.

19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select a point on the opposite roof line. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. move the cursor horizontally to the left. on the Options Bar. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .You create a split line vertically down the center. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. (Add points). you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Next. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 20 Using the same method.

exact placement of the points is not important. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. for the dimension.In this exercise. enter -2''. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 25 Using the same method. click (Modify Sub-Elements). The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. You modify the points individually. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 589 .

27 Press and hold CTRL. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. and select all of the roof edges. enter 4''. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 29 On the Design Bar. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions. click (Modify Sub-Elements). for Elevation. and press ENTER. click Modify.

under Construction. select Variable. for the Thermal/Air Layer. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. and on the Options Bar. click (Properties). double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. 35 Click OK 3 times. The entire slab is sloped. for Structure. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. In some cases this type of slope is desired. click Edit. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. 31 Select the roof slab. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 View the results in the section view. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 591 . click Edit/New. By making the insulation layer variable.

on the File menu. click Training Files. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. gutters. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click Save As. gutters. Gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 3 Press CTRL. and open Common\c_Condominium. you can easily create its fascia. and soffits.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and Soffits on page 592. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create roof fascia. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and Soffits In this lesson. select Fascia-Built-Up. After you create a roof.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. click (Properties). 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Gutters. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. Creating Fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. and click Open.

select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.7 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters on page 594. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK twice. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and click OK. under Construction. 13 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Name dialog. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click Duplicate. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Roof Fascia | 593 . click Modify to exit the Fascia command.

click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click Duplicate. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.rvt. click Edit/New. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click in the Value field for Material. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click (Properties). select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. under Construction. 3 In the Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK three times. 2 On the Options Bar. . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 Click to place the gutter. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium.Creating Gutters In this exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 594 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

Creating Soffits In this exercise. Creating Soffits | 595 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Pick Roofs. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. and double-click Roof. c_Condominium. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. Creating Soffits on page 595. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

expand Views (all). 8 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Join Geometry. and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views. 596 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 6 In the Project Browser.4 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Tools menu.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. Creating Soffits | 597 .

598 .

Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. expand Floor Plans. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. click Settings. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 2 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable.rvt. If you are using metric units. 3 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. and click Room and Area. Finally. click the Area Schemes tab. right-click in the Design Bar. In the final exercise. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. View predefined area schemes 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). click Training Files. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. 599 . TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. your values will be different.

as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 4 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. or 0. Create a gross building area plan 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Plan. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. 5 Click Cancel. These schemes define spatial relationships. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 7 In the New Area Plan dialog. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . it is not necessary in this exercise. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to 4 feet or above the level. Click OK. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings.There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click the Room Calculations tab. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan.

click Area Plan. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). To modify the area. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. you create a new area plan for rentable space. click Area. 9 In the Project Browser. Click OK. forming a closed loop. common areas. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. you must select one of the reference lines. 13 In the New Area Plan dialog. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). If you select No. 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 601 . rather than the area tag. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas.8 When the informational dialog displays. under Views (all). you must manually add these boundary lines. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. and store area. When you select Yes in this dialog. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. 11 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model.

click Area. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. you can either draw them or pick them.14 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 20 In the upper left corner of the building model. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. click Area Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . When you add area boundary lines. 15 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. When you pick the walls. 18 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Add area boundary lines 16 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 19 On the Design Bar. If you do not select this option.

do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 22 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 603 .21 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . click Modify and select the area. Click OK. 26 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click Area. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. and click to select the area. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Design Bar.

and Tenant 4 in the lower right. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 30 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.28 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 32 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 604 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 31 Add an area to the building model core. Click OK. and select Store Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name. click ■ ■ ■ . add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.

and click Save. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.rvt. click Save. 34 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. name the project Area-in progress. In this exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 605 .Notice that within the two store areas. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Color Scheme Legend. 33 On the File menu. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the legend. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. In the next exercise.

select Areas (Rentable). click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities.3 When the dialog displays. under Category. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Area Type and click Add. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 606 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 7 Under Available fields.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 607 .

608 .

You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. At any time. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. and perimeter information. 609 . you then need to update the building face. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you can specify the view to display massing elements. If you modify a massing face. After you make building elements. After creating mass floors. building elements. In this tutorial. floors. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. roofs. You assign the default wall. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. floor.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. and floors. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. curtain systems. and roofs. or both. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. volume.

and cutting geometry. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. click Create Mass.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. sweeps. and click Massing. click Training Files. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Start. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.

10 In the Materials dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. This means the sketch line is placed 5 feet from the position you pick with the cursor. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Lines. and click OK. 15 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). for Extrusion End. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 13 On the View toolbar. click 18 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. (Line). under Constraints. and click . for Offset. 12 On the Design Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter 5'0". 8 On the Design Bar. enter 80'0". Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. click Finish Sketch. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). under Materials and Finishes. (Pick Lines). for Name. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Mass (Opaque). click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. and click OK. click the value for Material. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 611 . click Lines. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. click Extrusion Properties. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

highlight the larger form. 21 On the Design Bar. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click West. under Views (all). under Materials and Finishes. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 23 In the Materials dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. under Constraints. click the value for Material. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. The second form is on top of the first form. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. and click OK. and click . for Name. select Pick a plane. enter 90'0". 30 In the drawing area. enter 80'0". double-click {3D} to see the results. 26 In the Project Browser. for Extrusion End. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Mass (Transparent). under Views (all).20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. for Extrusion Start.

31 Click to select the face. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 613 . Next. and clear Chain. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. click (Draw). 32 On the Sketch Design Bar.TIP If necessary. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. (Pick Lines). press TAB to highlight the entire face. and click to select the line start point. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 34 On the Options Bar.

TIP If you do not see this option. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click (Move). click Modify. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 39 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. 41 On the Edit toolbar. click (Arc passing through three points). 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.36 Sketch a line 19 feet up as shown. and delete the vertical construction line.

(Line). verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 53 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 52 On the Design Bar. for Material. click 49 Create an arc as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 615 . under Views (all). click Lines and. double-click East. click Finish Sketch. (Arc passing through three points). 45 In the Project Browser. click Blend Properties. 46 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. and click OK. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Edit Top. 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and that -300'0" is specified for Second End. 48 On the Options Bar.Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar.

In this exercise. select the mass. click Ref Plane. i_Massing_Start. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . In the next exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 2 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. under Views (all). Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 616.54 Proceed to the next exercise. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.rvt. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise.

These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. When sketching each extrusion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click (Default 3D View). snap the corners to the intersections. click (Pick Lines) and enter 50' for Offset.4 On the Options bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 617 . click Finish Sketch. enter 40'0" and for Extrusion Start. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 6 Place another reference plane 50' to the right of the first reference plane. 16 On the Design Bar. place 3 more reference planes 50' apart from left to right. NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. for Extrusion End. 14 Under Constraints. click Extrusion Properties. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. on the View Control Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. as shown. 7 Using the same technique. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. and select Chain. enter 0. 15 Click OK. click (Line). you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 10 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. and place the first reference plane 50' to the right.

3 On the Design Bar.In this exercise. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). and click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar. i_Massing_Start. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. double-click Level 1. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click Sketch 2D Path. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend.

click Finish Path. ■ For the radius. select a point below the mass elements. Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 6 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually.■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. Using Swept Blends | 619 .

and press ESC. as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 15 On the Design Bar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. click Profile 2. 11 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Edit. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 13 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines.Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click (Align). 10 On the Design Bar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click Profile 1. click (Rectangle). click Finish Profile. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. and sketch a 20' x 20' rectangle on the face of the mass. click (Default 3D View).

as shown: ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar.17 Using the same method. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. Using Swept Blends | 621 . Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. select Mass (Transparent). click Finish Swept Blend. click <By Category>. 23 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Swept Blend Properties. and click . 21 In the Materials dialog.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. 22 Click OK twice. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc.

You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. In this exercise. Finally. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 26 Save the file as i_Massing_Complete. click Finish Mass. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise.24 On the Design Bar. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you create new family types from a mass family file.

and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. for Depth. enter 40'0". and for Name. and click OK. enter 35'0". enter 225' x 30' x 60'. for Width. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. and open Imperial\Families\Massing\Box. and for Name. enter 225'0". 4 In the Family Types dialog. click New. for Depth. for Height. and click Apply. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK.rfa. enter 60'0". 6 For Width. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 150'0". 8 For Width. for Depth. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 50'0". 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 150' x 15' x 35'. enter 15'0". Creating New Mass Family Types | 623 . enter 60'0". and click Apply. 7 Click New. click Family Types. for Height. for Height. enter 50' x 60' x 40'. 9 Click OK. under Other.rfa. 5 Click New. In this exercise. enter 30'0".

9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 6 Open the Box-Training. Arc Dome.rfa family files. select Box-Training: 225' x 30' x 60'. and open Imperial\i_Massing_In-place. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. and open the Imperial\Families\Massing folder.rfa.rfa. You also load other existing mass families and place them. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Place Mass. under Floor Plans. 1 If not already selected. 3 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. under Views (all). 2 In the Project Browser.rfa. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. as shown. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. and Triangle. click Training Files. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. on the View toolbar. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . Semi Barrel Vault. (Show Mass) to show the massing model.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise.rvt. 8 In the Type Selector. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click (Element Properties). select Rotate after placement. as shown. click Modify. click Modify. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the drawing area. 17 Press CTRL. specify Mass (Opaque). 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click Modify. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. for the Material parameter. select the triangle. select Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40'. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. 16 On the Design Bar. select Triangle: 50' x 150' x 35'. select the 3 boxes. 14 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. click Place Mass. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.10 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. enter 90 for Angle. 24 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent). 11 Select the box. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 625 . 23 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). and click to place the mass.

select Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35'. specify Mass (Opaque). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing .26 Select the triangle. for the Material parameter. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. click (Default 3D View). click Place Mass. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent). and click OK twice. 29 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 33 On the View toolbar. and click OK twice.

Training File ■ Continue using the i_Massing_In-place. In this exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. (Join Geometry). click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View). You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise.rvt file. Joining Mass Elements | 627 .Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements. In the next exercise. NOTE When you join geometry.

4 Select the triangle. on the Edit toolbar. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. click (Mirror). under Views (all). double-click Site. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' as shown.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' mass element as shown.

Joining Mass Elements | 629 . 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' first. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Draw). 17 Press ESC to see the result. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click (Default 3D View). as shown. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. (Join Geometry). for Axis. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. enter SM. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.8 On the Options Bar. and then select the triangle.

click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.rvt. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Modify. (If Design Options is already selected. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_In-place. do not clear the check mark. 2 On the Window menu. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. and select the triangle mass element. click (Add to Design Option Set). 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. you joined mass elements together.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar.In this exercise. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. 1 On the Design Bar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model.

Mass Elements in Design Options | 631 . 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. select Sloped (primary). enter 90. click Place Mass. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. for Angle. 7 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. specify Mass (Transparent). and click OK. under Floor Plans. clear Curved. 14 In the drawing area. click Place Mass. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 13 On the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 35' x 50' x 25'. and click (Element Properties). 5 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Type Selector. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. select Rotate after placement. and click OK twice. under Views (all). double-click Site. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. select Arc Dome: 20'R x 9'H. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. click (Add to Design Option Set). and watch the status bar. and click OK. clear Sloped. under 3D Views. double-click North. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 20 In the drawing area. While pressing CTRL. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click OK twice. 28 In the Project Browser. select the three arc domes. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. under Views (all). click Modify. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. double-click {3D}. under Elevations. select Curved. specify Mass (Transparent). TIP To find the correct shapes. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 23 On the View Control Bar.

You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 31 Click the value for Design Option. you placed mass elements into Design Options. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. and click OK.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 In the Design Options dialog. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. click Make Primary. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 633 . under Option.rvt. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. and click Close. 35 On the File menu. click (Design Options). click the Design Options tab. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click Save As and save the file as i_Massing_Design_Options. 34 Close the warning that displays. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can make it the primary option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. select Curved and. In this exercise.

Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . and for Loc Line. click (Pick Faces). click Wall by Face. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Building_Components.Brick on CMU. 5 In the Type Selector. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. you pick massing faces to create walls. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. under Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Wall Centerline. click Training Files. 2 On the View toolbar.

Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 635 . ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Wall by Face. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 16 In the Type Selector. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. double-click Level 5. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 15 On the Design Bar. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap.

You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. under Floor Plans. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. under Views (all). 19 In the Project Browser.18 Select all the faces shown in red. If desired. click Wall by Face. 20 On the View Control Bar. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Level 9. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 21 On the Design Bar.

you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. and Walls. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 6 On the Options Bar.In this exercise. volume. and exterior surface area. When you select levels. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 8 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Curtain Panels. 4 Click OK. click Mass Floors. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Curtain Systems. select all levels. and click OK. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}.rvt. perimeter. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 637 .

select Levels 1-4. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Mass Floors. 11 On the Options Bar.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Modify. 10 Press CTRL. and select the three 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements and the mirrored 150' x 15' x 35' box masses as shown.

and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 225' x 30' x 60' box mass element as shown. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 639 . select Level 1.14 On the Options Bar. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). click Mass Floors. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 15 Press CTRL.

press and hold SHIFT. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. select Floor Area. The Floor Area.rvt. under Category.In this exercise. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Floor Perimeter. schedules can be created using the mass floors. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Add. Floor Volume. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Mass Floor. and select Level. under Available fields. 4 Using the same method. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses.

Mass Family Box-Training: 50'x60'x40' Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 641 . 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. for Sort by. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. enter Retail. for Usage. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. The Mass Floor Schedule displays.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Mass: Family and Type. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. and click OK. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Properties. under Other. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Mass: Family and Type.Mass Family Box-Training: 150'x15'x35' Box-Training: 225'x30'x60' Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 35'x50'x25' Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. After you assign usage. 14 Select Level. 13 With Usage selected. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. click Edit. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Fields. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. and click Remove. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted.

elevation. for Field formatting. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. select Usage. for Then by. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 23 In the Rename View dialog. and select Grand totals. 18 On the Filter tab. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. for Filter by. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the field under Filter by. and click OK. and click Rename. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. for Filter. and click OK. enter Hotel. select Calculate totals. under Other. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 16 On the Formatting tab. for Sort by. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Floor Area. and plan views. 24 In the Project Browser. and in the field below. under Fields. for Filter. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. select Level. 19 Click OK twice. under Other. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 22 In the Project Browser. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 27 Click OK twice. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 643 . click Edit.

644 | Chapter 17 Massing . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. 3 Select the top face of the left 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element as shown. by level. floor perimeter. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. The mass floor schedules list. under Views (all).rvt. click Roof by Face. double-click {3D}. you pick massing faces to create roofs. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. the floor area. you created mass floor schedules.

select Basic Roof : Generic . click Create Roof.12". Your model should now look as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. and also on the top faces of the 150' x 15' x 35' box mass elements. click Create Roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 645 . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element family.4 In the Type Selector. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements.

Curtain Systems. and click OK. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. select Curtain Panels. click Create Roof.8 Using the method you just learned. and Walls. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 13 Using the same method. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 On the Options Bar. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. In this exercise. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. select Sloped Glazing. in the Type Selector. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.

double-click {3D}. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 3 In the Type Selector.Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. 5 Press CTRL. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. under Views (all). 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create System. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain System : 5' x 5'. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 647 . click Curtain System by Face. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt.

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Using the same method.

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). click Create System. Creating Curtain Systems | 649 . 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 11 Using the same method.9 On the Options Bar.

Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. In this exercise.rvt. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . you change the size of an existing mass family. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 651 . 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Roofs. under Floor Plans. clear Exclude Design Options. Curtain Systems. click Visibility/Graphics. and then click OK. 7 On the Options Bar.1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Site. and Walls. enter 105'0". you resize one of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 3 On the Model Categories tab. for Width. clear Curtain Panels. and click (Element Properties). under Views (all). 4 Select the box mass family as shown. Floors. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the View menu. Next. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.

11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all).10 Open the 3D view to see the result. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 652 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1.

TIP To select the curtain wall. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 653 . 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 17 Select the roof as shown. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 14 On the Options Bar. you want to select the smaller one. 16 On the View toolbar. Also. click Remake. click (Default 3D View). click OK.

click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 654 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 655 . under Schedules/Quantities. you changed the size of an existing mass family. In this exercise. 1 Open the 3D view.20 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar.

4 Rename the view 3D . under 3D Views.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 9 Select Mass. 3 In the Project Browser. click All to select all categories.Massing only. 6 On the Model Categories tab. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 656 | Chapter 17 Massing . right-click {3D}. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.

You might create the model shown.In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 657 . This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. If desired.

658 .

This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. You mirror one instance of the group. For example. In this tutorial. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. 659 . you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and typical office layouts. Creating. You can also nest groups within other groups. and modify repetitive units. or with those working on a different project. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. When you make changes to a nested group. place. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you not only simplify their placement. hotel rooms. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. After you create a model group. In this exercise. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. Modifying. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. the host group is also updated automatically.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. you also simplify the modification process. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. all instances in the building model are updated. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. By grouping objects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. In another exercise. you add the new model group to a previously created group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity.

rvt. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. 2 Click in the drawing area. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and double-click First Floor.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Creating and Placing a Group | 661 . and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the center control for the group origin. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify.

13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. Creating and Placing a Group | 663 . and click Create Instance. expand Model. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify. right-click Typical Kitchen. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 12 On the Design Bar.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. under Groups. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.

The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. click (Mirror). 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.14 On the Edit toolbar.

Creating and Placing a Group | 665 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. click Modify. as shown. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 20 On the Design Bar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

23 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. you make changes to an instance of a group. press TAB to highlight the wall. Modifying a Group | 667 . i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. and click Save. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. When you finish editing. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click to select it.rvt.rvt. click Save As.

8 On the Design Bar.). NOTE To display an excluded element. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the wall. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the door.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). select the element. press TAB. click Modify.). press TAB. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 7 Click (Group Member.3 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. and click member to group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

click Door.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 12 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 669 . 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. move the cursor to the left. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall. click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar.

21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 22 In the drawing area. move the cursor up. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. In edit group mode.16 On the Design Bar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Edit Group. click Modify. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 20 On the Options Bar. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.

under Constraints. and on the Options Bar. enter 3' 4''. created in an earlier lesson. 25 Select the opening. for Unconnected Height. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Nesting Groups In this exercise. which acts as the host. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Nesting Groups | 671 . you add the Typical Kitchen group. click Finish. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click 27 For Base Offset. 28 On the group editor toolbar. (Element Properties). enter 7'. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.24 On the Design Bar. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. click Modify.

in the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. 3 On the Options Bar. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click (Add to Group). 5 In the drawing area.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Edit Group. select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 On the group editor toolbar.rvt. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. under Floor Plans.

6 Press TAB. 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. click Finish. double-click Second Floor. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. under Floor Plans. Nesting Groups | 673 . select the wall between the folding doors.

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. such as text. and filled regions. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. you add door tags to a group. such as door and window tags. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. double-click First Floor. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . In the next exercise. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Finish Sketch. click to draw a rectangular region. Creating a Detail Group | 675 . and select a point below the left elevator.

16 In the drawing area.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 9 On the Options Bar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and click OK. 14 On the Edit toolbar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and select the text note and the filled region. click Text. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. as shown. click to add an arc leader. click (Group).

Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. double-click Second Floor. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 677 . click Modify. Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the drawing area. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. expand Detail. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Groups. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Create Instance. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser.

as shown. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. clear Leader. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans.rvt. 678 | Chapter 18 Grouping .manner that a drawing component can be added. 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click First Floor.

click Check None. under Floor Plans. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups | 679 . click (Group). and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 11 In the Project Browser. for Attached Detail Group Name. select Door Tags. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog.7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click (Filter Selection). Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK.

click Place Detail. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 14 On the Options Bar. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. therefore. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File 680 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout.

right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Desktop. browse to the Desktop. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. In this case. click OK. and expand Model. 5 In the New Project dialog. under Groups\Model. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 3 For File name. A warning dialog displays. click Modify. verify that Project is selected. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Saving and Loading Groups | 681 . for Create new. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Save Group. expand Groups. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). and click Create Instance. accept the default template file. and click OK. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click Open. verify that Same as group name is selected. 12 On the Design Bar.rvt. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.

and click OK.rvt file is added as a link to the project. select the linked Revit model. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.rvt. When a group is converted to a link. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Remove Link. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and the link is removed. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. verify that Attached Details is selected only. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click Training Files. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 682 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Revit Links. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 24 In the message dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. click Use Existing. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Link. click OK. 20 On the Options Bar. click Bind. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area.

you add a building pad to the site. and then modify the data. convert the data to a table. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. islands. In the final exercises. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. You add property lines manually. and walkways. 683 . After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas.Site 19 In this tutorial.

click Point. and open Imperial\i_First_Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt This project file was created using the default imperial template. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the Options Bar. and double-click Site. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Using the first method. click Toposurface. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. expand Views (all). enter an absolute elevation of 10' 0". TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. The scale of this view is 1" = 20'. you create a toposurface using two different methods. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. In the second part of this exercise. click Training Files. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Site. 3 On the Design Bar.

The circle should be approximately 150' wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 685 . Use the following illustration as a reference. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.

TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. click Site Settings. 50'. enter 5' 0". under Increment. under Additional Contours. enter an absolute elevation of 20' 0". and 60' absolute elevations. 12 On the Settings menu. and click OK. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . 9 Add a concentric circle of 20' 0" elevation points inside the 10' 0" contour.8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. click Finish Surface. Use the following illustration as a reference. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 10 Repeat the previous step for 30'. 40'.

and double-click South. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 687 . 15 On the View Control Bar. and press ENTER. click Modify.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click to delete it. click (Default 3D View). click to view it at various angles. click the elevation value. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. (SteeringWheels). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 18 In the Project Browser. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. modify the level names and elevations. Before importing the contour data. enter 3' 0". and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. under Views (all). on the Standard toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. and press ENTER. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 30 On the Edit menu. click Yes. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Click Open. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and click OK. under Views (all). 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 29 Select the imported topography. For Colors. it is considered an import symbol. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Until it is exploded. click Training Files.21 Click the Level 2 text. click Pin Position. and press ENTER. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. under Floor Plans. select Preserve. rename the level Basement. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 28 On the Design Bar. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. 23 Click the Level 1 text. For Layers. select Specify. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 24 In the Project Browser.

and then click OK. click Toposurface. click Modify. click the Annotation Categories tab. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. clear Elevations. when the edges highlight. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 34 Under Visibility. 31 On the Design Bar. select it. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 36 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 32 On the View menu. Creating a Toposurface | 689 . click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance.This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved.

Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . click (Default 3D View). 40 On the View toolbar.When you select the import symbol. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. and click OK. click Finish Surface. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 42 On the View toolbar. clear C_INDX. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 39 On the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels).

This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click Modify. On the Design Bar.rvt. Select and delete the right vertical line. Site-in progress. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. name the project Site-in progress. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Using the second method. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Adding Property Lines on page 691. this project file is required in its current state. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Create property lines by sketching. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines. click Property Line.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar. do so before continuing.44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you add property lines using two methods. click Lines. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Property Lines | 691 . and click OK. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. and click Save. Using the first method. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. double-click Site.

6 On the Design Bar. select the lines. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. on the Standard toolbar. click OK.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. add an arc line on the right. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. and click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. click OK. select Edit Table. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click 12 On the Design Bar. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. 9 In the warning dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. to delete them. click Property Line. when they highlight. 8 On the Options Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.

If the gap is not closed. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. click to place the property lines. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 15 Starting in Row #1.14 In the Property Lines dialog. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 350' 0" S 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" W 350' 0" N 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. Adding Property Lines | 693 . 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 16 Click OK.

click Training Files. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible.Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line.rfa. 25 Under Visibility. this project file is required in its current state. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. clear Leader. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click to place it. click Visibility/Graphics. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click the Imported Categories tab. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 20 Click Load. The tags display more prominently in this view. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 30 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695. Before adding property line segment tags. and click Drafting. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In the final step. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off.dwg and click OK. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Civil\Property Line Tag. right-click in the Design Bar. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 19 In the Tags dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. you created two sets of property lines. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 On the Options Bar. 23 On the View menu. 22 In the Tags dialog. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. the original DWG file remains visible in the view.

10 Under Additional Contours. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Topography. and click OK. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. under Contour Line Display. 2 On the Settings menu. Under Line Color. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 695 . You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. specify the following values: ■ Under Start. Site-in progress. In the Object Styles dialog. 7 Click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter the name Working Contour. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. enter 3' 0".rvt. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Dash dot. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. specify an interval of 2' 0" passing through elevation 0' 0". Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise.In the next exercise. click Site Settings. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Under Line Pattern. select a shade of Brown. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click New. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. click Object Styles. for Subcategory.

Under Subcategory. you create topographic subregions to define roads. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.■ ■ Under Range Type. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . select Working Contour. Working Contour. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. The next exercise requires a new training file. In this exercise. The object style subcategory. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. and islands. 11 Click OK. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 697. select Single Value. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. parking areas. In the next exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. try to replicate the location and proportion. you create subregions in order to define roads. parking areas.Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. such as material. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. and islands. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Lines. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_Site. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.rvt. click Subregion.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. enter Parking for Name. 8 On the Design Bar. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. the vertical rectangle is approximately 64' wide. select Site . click the value for Material.Asphalt for Name. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 24' wide. 6 In the Materials dialog. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click Finish Sketch. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. and click OK. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Properties.

9 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site - Asphalt. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each, the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Topography Schedule.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. As you create new subregions, they display within this schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 12 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit Boundary. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 18' deep to accommodate parking spaces.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 699

TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines, and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the project area has increased.

Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. In this training project, additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Within each subregion, you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Subregion. 22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

700 | Chapter 19 Site

23 In the upper-right parking area, use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.

24 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the value for Material, and click to open the Materials dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog, select Site - Grass for Name, and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Island - Grass for Name, and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 29 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

30 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 701

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. Name each region Island Grass, and apply the material Site - Grass.

32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 34 On the Design Bar, click Subregion. 35 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name the subregion Walkway, and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Place Concrete - walkway.

702 | Chapter 19 Site

WARNING Subregions cannot intersect, so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 4".

37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 703

39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder, name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt, and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 41 Proceed to the next exercise, Grading the Toposurface on page 704.

Grading the Toposurface
In this exercise, you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. When you use the grading tool, the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface.

704 | Chapter 19 Site

3 On the Options Bar, click

(Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK. A warning dialog is displayed, stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, Using Phasing on page 767. 6 On the Design Bar, click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog, select Copy Internal Points, and click Select and Edit. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 8 Select the topographic surface.

Grading the Toposurface | 705

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

10 Press DELETE.

706 | Chapter 19 Site

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing, demolished, and new.

11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

Grading the Toposurface | 707

13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar, click Point. 15 On the Options Bar, specify an Absolute Elevation of 18' 0". 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.

17 On the Design Bar, click Finish Surface. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.

18 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

19 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

708 | Chapter 19 Site

20 On the View toolbar, click to view it at various angles.

(SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface

The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view.

Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu, click View Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify Existing for Phase, and click OK. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Therefore, only the original toposurface displays, because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project, you can delete it. 23 Select the toposurface, and delete it. 24 On the View menu, click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify New Construction for Phase, and click OK. Only the graded topography displays.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 27 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Building Pad on page 709.

Adding a Building Pad
In this exercise, you create a building pad. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element, nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. When you add a building pad, it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.

Adding a Building Pad | 709

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Pad. NOTE By default, the Pick Walls command is active. If you have an existing building model, you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 4 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar, sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

710 | Chapter 19 Site

TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry, see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578.

7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View).

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new building pad.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Site Components on page 712.

Adding a Building Pad | 711

Adding Site Components
In this exercise, you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Parking Component. 3 In the Type Selector, select Parking Space: 9' x 18' - 90 deg. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.

712 | Chapter 19 Site

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

8 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

Adding Site Components | 713

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new parking spaces.

Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector, choose any tree type, and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

714 | Chapter 19 Site

13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

14 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

15 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Adding Site Components | 715

rvt. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Hidden Line. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. click Apply. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag Parking Tag: Boxed. 5 On the View menu. and click Apply. 716 | Chapter 19 Site . Site tutorial-in progress. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag Planting Tag: Boxed. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 716. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.

Click again to the left to position the leader. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. as shown: 10 Using the same method. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. 8 On the Options Bar. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. to position the shoulder of the leader. Click up and to the left. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 717 . In the following exercise. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. outside of the site.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark.

13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. click Modify. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 718 | Chapter 19 Site .

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 On the Design Bar.■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 719 . You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 719.

select Type. 12 In the Site plan. double-click Site. click Close Hidden Windows. Site tutorial-in progress. and under Heading.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 Under Fields. click Tile. under Floor Plans. click Schedule/Quantities. The parking schedule is displayed. and click OK. select Parking for Category. 720 | Chapter 19 Site . 5 Under Available fields. select Mark. If necessary. click the Fields tab.rvt. 11 On the Window menu. and click Add. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Views (all). select Type. select Mark. 4 Under Available fields. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Add. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 9 On the Window menu. enter Space. 8 Under Fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. enter Size. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and under Heading.

number the first three spaces consecutively. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 721 . Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.13 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 14 In the Parking Schedule. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Space.

722 .

Elements specific to a view. You can enable Worksharing for any project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. use Element Borrowing. you specify an active workset. Using Worksharing. When you are working on a shared project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. All other team members can view this workset. they cannot make changes to it. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. 723 . After the project is shared.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. go to the Worksets dialog. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. called Worksharing. and click Editable. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. doors. you must first enable Worksharing. stairs. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. To make a workset editable. The first time you activate worksets within a project. floors. A workset is a collection of building elements. select the desired workset. such as walls. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. In this tutorial. and so on. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. however. such as annotations and dimensions. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element.

you can select which worksets are open or closed.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Instead. Team size 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . In a multi-story structure. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. When setting up Worksharing. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. In the next exercise. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. such as a tenant interior. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. After learning the fundamentals. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work.

the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. and View worksets. with each assigned a specific functional task. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Experience has shown that. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 725 . Team member roles Typically. In most projects. Shared Levels and Grids. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. When you create a new workset. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. When creating the new worksets. Regardless of the default setting. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. designers work in teams. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. for a typical project. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. not including the Project Standards. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. On this tab. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. You should have at least one workset for each person. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. As new members create worksets for their own use. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project.

When you save locally (to your local file). When finished or at regular intervals. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. When you save to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. This is called “Selective Open. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. your changes are saved. proceeds as usual. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. After saving to the central file. When you save to the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. As you work. you make that workset editable by you. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. however. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . your changes propagate to the entire team.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Therefore. the file is saved as the central file. you should then save to your local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Generally. you can select which workset is active. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. For example.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. if a workset named Interior was created. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. On the Options Bar. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. However. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. This makes them available to other team members. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. within the local file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day.

or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. make any required worksets editable. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. and then save the local file. In this conceptual exercise. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. In this instance. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. and make that workset editable. In this situation. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. Alternatively. When working remotely. you should check out the Materials workset. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. for instance. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. using VPN. you work no differently then you would in the office. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 727 . reload the latest changes from the central file. To do this. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. save to the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset.

under Show. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. The Worksets dialog displays. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. click Training Files. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. and notice all are editable by you. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.rvt." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.In the next exercise. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. click Worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Your username displays as the present owner. and open Common\c_Worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise.

one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 12 Click Rename. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. clear Families. 13 In the Rename dialog. 16 In the drawing area. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. type the name Exterior Shell. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. imagine four users including yourself. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. When you initially activate Worksharing. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Only User-Created worksets should display. and double-click Level 1. currently named Workset1. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. click OK. Therefore. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. you can rename the default workset. a small number of team members are working on the building model. In this training file. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. For example. Because the interior walls appear in many views. however. another is assigned the interior layout. In this case. Project Standards. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. ■ 5 Under Show. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. click New. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 8 Click OK. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and Views. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. In this simple training project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 729 .When you enable worksharing. 14 In the Worksets dialog. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. clear Visible by default in all views. 11 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 9 Click New. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. You do. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. it is better to make them visible by default. select Workset1.

including the interior doors. stairs.17 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. under Identity Data. click . notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. under Identity Data. and walls. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click . 20 Select one of the interior walls. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click . 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click the Worksets tab. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Visibility/Graphics. 29 Click OK. 19 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. 21 On the Options Bar. 23 Select all of the interior elements. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. and click OK. and click OK.

36 In the Element Properties dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 731 . This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 42 On the right side of the dialog. If any interior elements remain. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. click Non Editable. 34 In the drawing area. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 41 In the Worksets dialog. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. click Save As. you enabled Worksharing on a project. click Visibility/Graphics. click Close. 38 In the Save As dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Worksets. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. select all of the interior elements of the building model. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. Now that you have created the central file. 44 On the File menu. 43 Click OK. 30 On the View menu. 39 Click Save. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. under Identity Data. under Floor Plans. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. and click OK. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 32 Select Interior Layout. 35 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Project Browser. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. double-click Level 2. click the Worksets tab. under Views (all). Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. In this exercise. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. make sure you remember the location of this central file. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets.

732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 8 In the File Save Options dialog. select the central file. select Interior Layout. and double-click Level 1. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Next. and click Save. 15 In the Project Browser. select Interior Layout for Name. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Open. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 13 On the Window menu. select all the User-Created worksets. you create your local file. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 6 On the File menu. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. and select Specify. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Worksets. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Before working on the model. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 7 In the Save As dialog. check out worksets. If you have not yet completed the exercise. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. click Save As. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. expand Views (all). and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 2 In the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. please do so before continuing. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 12 Click OK. In this case. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 4 Click Open. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and click OK. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. and select Yes for Editable. make modifications to the building model. In addition. 11 In the Worksets dialog. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 728. click Options. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets.

20 Under Constraints. If this is selected. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click . 18 On the Options Bar. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. On the Options Bar. however. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Verify that it is cleared. click Worksets. notice the Editable Only option.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click OK. you can still edit this wall. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. under Identity Data. In this case. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. In the Worksets dialog. If it was owned by another user. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 23 On the File menu. click Modify. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Because this element is not owned by another user. click . Working Individually with Worksets | 733 . 24 Click OK. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes.

28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector.126mm Partition (2-hr). select Basic Wall: Interior . 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. click Wall. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. The precise location is not important. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. click Door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 26 Delete the door. 31 On the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 34 In the Type Selector.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Modify. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

make elements editable. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. In this particular case. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. click Save to Central. In addition. it is recommended. displays the workset as well as the element type. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. At the end of a work session. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. Throughout the process. you should perform regular saves. You modified the building model. each user must check out worksets. you should relinquish all worksets. leave this file open in its current state. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. When working in your local file. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 735 . and save locally immediately afterward. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Borrowed Elements is selected. In this exercise. save to central. and reload the latest changes. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Whenever you save. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. a tooltip. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. For training purposes. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. checked out worksets. add two door openings into the rooms you created. you created your local file. please do so before continuing. By default. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. two users access the central file through a network connection. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2.

select the central file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and click OK. and click OK. click Options. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. click Options. return to the Settings dialog. and select Specify. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 4 Click the General Tab and. select all the User-Created worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. This is a system setting. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 3 On the Settings menu. and proceed to Creating a local copy. 7 In the Open dialog. click Open. 9 Click Open. consider that person to be User 1. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. under Username. and click OK. This file is for your use only. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. For training purposes. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. You now have a local copy of the project. In the following section of this exercise. instructions are staggered. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. In addition. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Yes for Editable. enter User 2. specifically sequenced. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 11 On the File menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. Throughout the remainder of this exercise.rvt. click Worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. User 2: Create a local file. 15 On the File menu. one user has already created a local file. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 12 In the Save As dialog. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. click Save As. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. skip the following section.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 27 On the File menu. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. click Save to Central. select the lower exterior wall. 19 On the File menu. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. and select Yes for Editable. it becomes the active workset.” 29 Click OK. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Views (all). Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. User 1: Check out worksets. and double-click Level 1. 23 Click OK. expand Views (all). If it is not open. modify the building model. 24 In the Project Browser. open it now. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 737 . A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and double-click Level 1. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. click Worksets.You are now the owner of that workset. If you only have one workset checked out. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 17 Click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. expand Floor Plans. 28 In the Save to Central dialog.

” 39 Click OK. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. Before adding any furniture. click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. Click Yes. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 738 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. and click OK. right-click Level 1. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 33 On the File menu. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. click Save to Central. and click Rename. 43 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Views (all). delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 44 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. under Floor Plans. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Reload Latest. click Worksets. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 41 On the File menu.” 35 Click OK. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Yes for Editable. and click OK. 46 In the Project Browser. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Floor Plans. 42 Select Furniture Layout. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 37 On the File menu. However. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. When you save to central. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. right-click Copy of Level 1. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. you should create a furniture plan view.

choose any desk. rather than Families. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. and click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the Visible by default option was not selected. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. Therefore. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Save to Central. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Component. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Save to Central. and click OK. click Reload Latest.200mm. 53 On the File menu. 50 On the View menu. 48 In the Type Selector. and click inside any room. 61 Click OK 2 times. 62 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. are placed under Project Standards. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 On the Design Bar. click Rename. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 66 On the File menu. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. enter Exterior Wall . click the Worksets tab. click Edit/New. and click Element Properties. 60 In the Rename dialog. select Project Standards. click Modify.” 55 Click OK. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 65 Click OK. click Worksets. click Visibility/Graphics. such as Wall Types. NOTE System families. under Show. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 63 In the Worksets dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 739 .

NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 740. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. modified the building model. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and these problems are rectified.rvt. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. In the final exercise of this tutorial. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. and save 69 On the File menu. click Save As. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. In subsequent steps. select Save to Central. and click OK. This exercise requires two users and. Checking out worksets. throughout this training. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 3 In the Save As dialog. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. you save the training file as a central file. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. you need to set up your central and local files. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. There are specific instructions for each user. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and still have your local files open. Each user checked out worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. User 1: Reload latest. 70 On the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 740 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. As each of you work. click Options. leave this file open in its current state. Each user must have network access to the central file. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. and published their changes back to the central file. select Reload Latest. At the appropriate point in this exercise. select the following. finished the previous workset exercises. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. leave this file open in its current state.

■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 12 On the File menu. and click OK. and click OK.4 In the File Save Options dialog. select Make this a Central File after save. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. return to the Settings dialog. select the central file. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Options. and click Save. click Options. This is the local file for User 1. click Save As. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. click Save As. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Options. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 17 On the File menu. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. You have created a local file which is for your use only. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. On the Settings menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click OK. click Open. 8 In the Save As dialog. 5 Click Save. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 6 On the File menu. 15 Click Open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 741 . This is a system setting. and click Save. Next. In addition. The central file should still be open. 18 In the Save As dialog. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and select Specify. 13 In the Open dialog. Set the Username to User 2. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.

click Worksets. select them.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. verify that Editable Only is cleared. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 26 In the Worksets dialog. You are now the owner of that workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and then click OK. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. At this point. select the second window from the top. and select Yes for Editable. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. You are now the owner of that workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. under Floor Plans. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. Afterwards. and then click OK. and click Editing Requests. 29 On the Options Bar. click the File menu. double-click Level 1. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and click Open. 27 Under Active Workset. 30 On the left exterior wall. select the Interior Layout workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 24 Under Active Workset. and select Yes for Editable. select Exterior Shell. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 22 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. select Interior Layout. click Worksets. After you submit the request. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 742 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .

40 In the Save to Central dialog. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and close 39 On the File menu. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. and click OK. you requested permission to edit the element. 35 Click Grant. select the following. select the request submitted by User 2. A message informs you that your request has been granted. In this case. and the other user granted it. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 743 . to Local.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. click Close. 36 Click Close. In this multi-user exercise. select Save to Central. 38 Click OK. click Check Now. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog.

744 .

After you and the client agree on the final design. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. 745 . For example. At any time in the design process. Using design options. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. and each option set can have multiple schemes. In addition. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have multiple sets of design options. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. In this tutorial. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model.

TIP In this exercise. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you can edit it. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. the only available command is to create a new option set. make your final design decision. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). and delete the unwanted options from the project. In the final exercise of this lesson. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. the roof and structure systems must work together. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In the second exercise. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each is constructed for interchangeability. therefore. The client has asked you to create various options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. under Option Set. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. click Training Files. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. each with multiple design options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise.In this particular case. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. After you create a design option. you set up multiple design option sets. With the second option. click New. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu.rvt. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you design each of the structural options. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In the first exercise in this lesson. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options.

click 12 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. expand Views (all). and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and the third column centered between the two. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. By selecting Multiple. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. click Column. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 7 In the Type Selector. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. TIP To center the middle column. click Modify. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. add three columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 9 On the Design Bar. or add a dimension string between the columns. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). click Edit Selected. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. In this case. 4 In the Project Browser. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. In the following illustration. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. expand Floor Plans.3 Select Option 1 (primary). the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 5 On the View menu. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. and click Close. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model.

click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. click . they are difficult to see in this view. A copy of the three selected columns is added. When you are finished. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique. Because of the size of the columns. 18 On the View toolbar.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 17 Zoom out and.

click Modify.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 21 In the Type Selector. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. select Round Bar : 2". under Floor Plans. 23 On the Design Bar. The second click specifies the end of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Adding a beam is a two-click process. double-click TOP OF CORE. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. you add the beams that span the columns. Use the following illustration as a guide. 19 In the Project Browser. Zoom in on the upper right column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. click Beam. Next. In it. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click the center point. 28 Zoom out. zoom into the left column. move down to the next set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and select the center of the column to add a copy. select: ■ ■ ■ . click . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. click 26 On the Options Bar. 30 On the View toolbar.

click Rename. click Rename. name the option Louvers. enter Beam for New. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 43 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. There should now be two roofing design options. 46 Under Option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 751 . 34 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option. click Rename. and click OK. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. not a new option set. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 41 Under Option Set. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. select Option 1 (primary). and click OK. click Rename. 38 In the Rename dialog. under Option. click New. 40 In the Rename dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 37 Select Option 2 and. under Option. enter Structure for New. 45 Under Roofing. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option Set. and click OK. under Option. click New. click New.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option Set. enter Roofing for New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. click Rename. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 36 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New.

Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. it will resemble the following illustration. Under Now Editing. select Edit Selected. 48 Under Option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Option 2. select Beam. under Floor Plans. name the option Sunscreen. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Rename. When finished. 53 In the Project Browser. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 52 Click Close. under Structure. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 51 Under Edit. and click OK.47 Under Roofing. This allows you to more easily manage the project. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. you create the second design option.

click Component. select Roof Beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 753 . click Align.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 58 On the Tools menu. Refer to the following illustration. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 56 In the Type Selector. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam.

click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 61 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 62 Select the beam and. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.60 After aligning the beam. The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents the move end point. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

rvt.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. Creating the Structural Design Options | 755 . the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click . click Finish Editing. 70 On the File menu. name the file. 68 In the Design Options dialog. click Save As. which is visible by default. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. i_Urban_House-in progress. 67 On the Tools menu. and click Save. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 69 Click Close. 66 On the View toolbar. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice that even before you close the dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. you need this file in its current state.

3 In the Design Options dialog. click Edit Selected. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. each with multiple design options to pick from. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display.rvt. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. The second roofing system. 6 In the Project Browser. you design each of the roofing options. Sunscreen. 4 Under Edit. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. open it now. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. If you need to add dimensions. expand Floor Plans. delete them after the rafter is in place. Under Now Editing. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. do so now. you set up multiple design option sets.In this exercise. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. With the second option. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Roofing. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. 10 Referring to the following illustration. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. a Louver system. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. and double-click TOP OF CORE. In the next exercise. expand Views (all). The first option. select Louvers (primary). the other for beams. 5 Click Close. 8 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Tools menu. click Component. select Rafter 2 x 10. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 2nd for Move To. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 757 . 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 13 On the Options Bar.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Constrain. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 15 On the Edit menu. Enter 5 for Number. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click . under Other. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 38' 6" for Length. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click Array. click Modify. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. and click OK. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. TIP When entering a dimension value. For example. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. you can enter 3 3.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. when the listening dimension displays. enter 3' 3". and press ENTER. The space separates feet and inches. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . rather than entering 3' 3".

select Louver 2 x 6. and click Array. Select 2nd for Move To. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. Enter 34 for Number. 23 On the Options Bar. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 26 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 25 With the louver still selected. enter 1’. 20 In the Type Selector. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and press Enter. when the listening dimension displays.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Edit menu. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the louver you just placed. under Other. and. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 759 . click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click Component. click . 27 For the array starting point. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. Select Constrain. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 22 On the Design Bar.

The louver roof system is complete. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the Tools menu. under Edit. click Finish Editing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. click . 31 In the Design Options dialog. 29 On the View toolbar.

In this case. and then click Close. under Roofing. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and double-click West. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 33 Under Editing. expand Elevations. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. select Sunscreen. The first two points define the ends of the line. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. click Edit Selected. 34 In the Project Browser. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 761 . you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click . Therefore. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 40 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 41 Select the top of the left column. Click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 43 On the Design Bar. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. You will fix this in a later step. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. then you can modify it through the dimension. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 39 On the Design Bar. and click OK. the top of the next column on the right. and the third point defines the arc. click Properties.

then the center arc. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and then click Close. 45 Click OK. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. In this exercise. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Select the right arc. The louver roof system is complete. you need this file in its current state. Under Constraints. under Edit. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. click Trim/Extend. Sunscreen. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. The arcs should connect. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. 50 On the Tools menu. click Save. The first option. 48 On the Design Bar. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. The second roofing system. click . 51 In the Design Options dialog. 46 On the Tools menu. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 52 On the File menu. 762 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 49 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. you designed each of the roofing options. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. click Finish Editing. a Louver system.44 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints.

right-click {3D}. and last options. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. secondary. tertiary. double-click Secondary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click the Design Options tab.Managing Design Options In this exercise. make it part of the building model. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 11 On the View menu. under Views (all). Managing Design Options | 763 . 5 Right-click each of the copies. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. 7 On the View menu. After exploring the combinations. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. expand 3D Views. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. enter Primary Option. 10 In the Project Browser. you select a design. and click Rename. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). 4 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 2 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. do so now. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Primary Option. and click Rename. 9 Click OK. and delete the discarded design options. under Views (all). under 3D Views.

under Views (all).13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 15 On the View menu. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. and click OK. double-click Last Option. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. 19 On the View menu. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 764 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Views (all). 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. double-click Tertiary Option.

the beam option becomes part of the model. click Close. In this case. click Accept Primary. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 25 Select Structure. click Delete. This was the client choice for structural. 31 In the alert dialog. 22 On the Tools menu. since you no longer need them. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 29 Select Roofing. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under Structure. click Yes. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Yes. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 24 Under Option. 27 In the alert dialog. In your design options. the current primaries are no longer options. 30 Under Option Set. double-click Primary Option. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. select Make Primary. Managing Design Options | 765 . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Because the client has selected the design option. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.At this point. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 26 Under Option Set. but should be accepted as part of the building model. select Beam. The set is deleted. An alert is displayed.

35 On the File menu. and deleted the discarded design options. made it part of the building model. click Save. In this exercise. After exploring the combinations. you selected a design. 766 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.

In the second exercise. You create new phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. and then add new building model elements. demolish existing walls and doors. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. 767 . This changes room definition and total building model area. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. For the client. In the lesson and exercises that follow.Project Phasing 22 In any project. demolish existing construction. complete with schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You create new phases. In the second exercise. then add new walls and doors in a different location. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.

This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. As you add new elements to the building model.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. are visible in this view. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. expand Floor Plans. During the demolition and renovation process. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Cancel. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. under Phasing. If you wish to do so. and double-click Level 1. you do not need to change the project units to metric. expand Views (all). click Modify. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. This means that all building model elements. click Project Units. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. When you create a new project. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Phasing. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. define the units. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. under Phasing. click Training Files. 7 Click Cancel. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and click OK. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. click (Element Properties). In the Element Properties dialog. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. go to the Settings menu. regardless of phase.

are highlighted in red. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 19 In the Project Browser. Because this is a renovation project. under Floor Plans. Phasing Your Model | 769 . After you release the mouse button. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific.Demo. under Floor Plans. under Phasing. and click OK. and click Rename. right-click Level 1. and click OK. Because this is a phase-specific view. click . After you create the views. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click Rename.Existing. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 12 On the Options Bar. clear Door Tags. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. all of the building model elements. 11 In the Filter dialog. right-click Level 1 .Existing. and click OK. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. enter Level 1 . for Phase Created. click Modify. click (Filter Selection). 16 In the Rename dialog.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. enter Level 1 . you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Rename dialog. select Existing.Existing. including the door tags. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 17 Click No. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. and click OK.

Later in this exercise. for Phase.Existing. 26 In the Phasing dialog. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. under Floor Plans. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . enter Composite Plan. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Phase status is time-dependent. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. Because of this time relationship. There are five default phase filters. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. Next. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. select Overridden. under New. On a logical time line. however. Demolished. double-click Level 1 . 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 29 For Composite Plan. click the Phase Filters tab. 27 Click New. 28 Under Filter Name. You may need to zoom in to see this. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Project Browser. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. you modify these settings. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. Existing. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. In this case. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . and Temporary.Demo. select Existing. new construction occurs after existing construction. to which all the building model elements belong. under Phasing.

select the line style. you demolish all elements hosted by it.31 Under Phase Status. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. double-click Level 1 . specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. under Floor Plans. click the value for Color. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. under Cut ➤ Lines. its display changes to a red dashed line. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. select a lighter blue. 35 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. select red. click OK. double-click Level 1 . select Demolished. click (Demolish). There are two ways to demolish an element. or you can use the demolish tool. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 36 Using the same method.Existing.Demo. As you click each wall. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 34 In the Color dialog. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. you begin demolition. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 32 In the Demolished row. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 42 In the Project Browser. Phasing Your Model | 771 . select the interior walls one at a time. When you demolish the host. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Next.

and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. click Wall. for Phase Filter. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 55 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. The demolished walls no longer display. 49 On the Design Bar. under Phasing. 53 Open Level 1 . 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Phase Filter.Existing. select Basic Wall: Interior . Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. add a long horizontal wall. and click OK. click Door.Demo. 47 In the Type Selector. 52 Open Level 1 . 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 772 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and click OK. select Show Previous + New. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 50 In the Type Selector. 51 Add a door leading into each room.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.

The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 62 If necessary. 59 Open Level 1 . click (Default 3D View). new is shown in blue. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo.New. 61 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . right-click Level 1 . All elements are displayed in this view.Demo. The renovated building model plan is displayed. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). because the phase filter is set to Show All. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. and existing shows as half-tone. 60 On the View toolbar. which are displayed as red. regardless of phase.New. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. Phasing Your Model | 773 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 57 In the Project Browser. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.

2 Open Level 1 .New. sizes. therefore. In this view. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. go to the Settings menu. You can also see that the room quantities. and click OK. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. In this view. expand Floor Plans. As the renovation process continues. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. In the next exercise.Existing. All room boundaries are phase-specific. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. 63 Close the file. define the units. click Training Files. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides.Demo. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. the rooms change in both definition and size. If you wish to save this file. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 774 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and double-click Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. demolition. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Project Units. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.rvt. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. 3 Open Level 1 . expand Views (all). Notice that this view is the original building model. you can see the new walls added to the building model. In this exercise. you can do so at this time. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. and new construction.

13 Open Level 1 .New. 10 Open Level 1 . click Room. Use the following illustration as a guide. 9 On the Design Bar.Demo. 6 Open Level 1 . 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Room. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner.Existing. click Modify. click Room Tag. 11 On the Design Bar.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 775 . yet they have different room numbers. In the Phasing dialog. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click in each room as you move to the right. and maximize the view.

20 Close the file. 18 Open Room Schedule . In this exercise. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 17 On the Window menu. 776 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View phase-specific room schedules. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 19 On the Window menu. expand Schedules/Quantities. The two schedule views tile. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 16 In the Project Browser.Existing. In this case. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. click Tile. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. and double-click Room Schedule . The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. click Close Hidden Windows. In addition. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.15 Using the following illustration as a guide.New Construction.

A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. 777 . In these situations. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. This maximizes efficiency. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. You position the building models on the site plan. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. In the final lesson. In this tutorial. performance. and manage the links throughout the project. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. modify their visibility. Comparison of alternatives on a site.

Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You link two building models to the project. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. modify their visibility. One building model is a condominium. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. You position the building models on the site. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. and the other is a townhouse. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .

c_Townhouse. right-click. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step.rvt. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . c_Condo_Complex. and click OK. click Open. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. click Training Files. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Otherwise. this option will place the link at a predefined location. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. this system is not exposed to the user.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Select c_Site. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. however.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. and click Properties. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the File menu. ■ ■ Manual .■ Auto . and save the file there. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. and open Common\c_Site. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 4 On the File menu. click Close. 2 On the File menu. All three files now reside. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. RELATED See the lesson. with write permission. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 795. click Save As. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. select the three files. you can do so. This option is grayed out. Manual . 8 Clear Read-only.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. click Open. Auto .

780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto . For Positioning. 11 On the File menu. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 13 Click Open. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.■ Click Open.Origin to Origin. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. Notice the blue detail lines.

After you select it. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 781 . The Move command requires two clicks. The second click specifies the move endpoint. After you specify the location to move to. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 15 On the Edit toolbar. 16 For the move start point. The linked model moves as one object. 17 For the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The first click specifies the move start point.rvt displays in the Type Selector. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. click (Move).Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.

18 On the View menu. For Positioning. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. and select c_Townhouse. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. select Auto . 21 Click Open. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

when the vertical line displays. click (Rotate). click to specify the rotation start point. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. In this case. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 783 . and then click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.23 On the Edit toolbar. and click to specify the end of the rotation.

This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. click (Move). 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 785 . select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The Copy command works much like the Move command. click (Copy). 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point. The first click specifies the start point.

33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 37 On the View toolbar. under Identity data. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Townhouse A. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click (Default 3D View). 34 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Name. click Rotate. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 32 On the Edit menu. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. click .

do so before continuing. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. click Save. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise.38 On the File menu. they were placed too low within the site topography. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. After linking the files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. click and hold Orbit. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In the next exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 787 . you need this project file open and in this view. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. When you originally linked the files. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation.

This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you first select the plane you want to align to. under Views (all). and click to select the line. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. click (Align). In this case. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. In the steps that follow. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. Click the Revit Links tab. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. To do this. expand Elevations.rvt. and then select the plane that you want to align. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. and click to select it. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. when it highlights. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. When using the Align command. and double-click South.

click and hold Orbit. This would over-constrain the model. double-click North. 11 Return to the South elevation view. 12 On the View toolbar. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click 13 On the View toolbar. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. (SteeringWheels).Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 15 On the File menu. click Save. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 789 . align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. click (Default 3D View). Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 9 In the Project Browser. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. under Elevations.

11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click OK. detail level. 10 Click OK. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. expand c_Townhouse. By linked view. In the next exercise. In this exercise. When you link a file. you need this project file open and in this view. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. 2 On the View menu. or Custom. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. select <Custom>. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.rvt. click By Host View. you can independently control the visibility settings. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. display settings. double-click South. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project.rvt. If the Basics page is set to Custom. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 8 For Annotation Categories. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. scroll down and clear Levels. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. click the Revit Links tab. under Elevations. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 4 Under Visibility.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. As you can see. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. click Custom. 9 Under Visibility. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. do so before continuing. and the halftone settings for each linked project. click Visibility/Graphics.

click the Revit Links tab. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. medium. With linked files. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. no detail level changes are required. Using the Custom option. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. In this case. under Display Settings. click the Revit Links tab. By selecting custom under Model Categories.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 24 Click OK. or fine. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. By default.rvt. 23 In the Model categories list. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. select Custom. on the Basics tab. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. and then set the detail level to coarse. select <Custom>. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 16 Under Visibility. expand c_Townhouse. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 791 . you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.rvt. click By Host View. 20 For c_Townhouse. You can click the value for Detail Level. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu.

select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. With the Show All filter applied. In this exercise. 29 Click OK. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. 26 Under Display Settings. 31 On the File menu. click Custom for the Townhouse link. this is preferable. However. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. 25 On the Revit Links tab. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. phase. there are situations. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. click OK. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. on a sloped site for instance. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In most cases. existing. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. By default. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. you manage the linked files.rvt. you need this project file open and in this view. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. In this case. select c_Townhouse. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. In the next exercise. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. and phase filter of a specific link. click Save. All other components are grayed out. In this case. demolished. under Visibility. all new. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

rvt. do so before continuing. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. 3 Under Path Type. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. click Manage Links. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 5 Click Unload. 7 Click OK. Notice the Loaded. select c_Condo_Complex. click the Revit tab. In a shared coordinate environment. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. Locations Not Saved. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. Managing Linked Building Models | 793 . 4 Under Linked File. The default path type is Relative. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. In general. You learn more about this in the next lesson. 6 At the confirmation prompt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. the link is maintained. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. click Yes. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified.

TIP In the Manage Links dialog. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. click Save As. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. and select Specify. the link is not loaded. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. When you initially place the link. click the arrow next to the Open button. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. To do this. expand Revit Links. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. 8 In the Project Browser. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. 9 On the File menu. right-click c_Condo_Complex. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. If you choose not to open that workset. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated.rvt. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. In these cases. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. However. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. and click Reload. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. In general.

When you share coordinates between projects. and the resulting project files. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. In the next lesson. When used in conjunction with model linking. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. In essence. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. name the file Site_Project. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 795 . When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. In this exercise. do so before continuing.10 In the Save As dialog. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. The host file consists primarily of site components. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 778. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. leave the project file open in its current view. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. If you have not completed the previous lesson. and save it as an RVT file. you are establishing a shared origin point. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside.

As indicated in the Status Bar. If you have closed the project. Linking Building Models on page 778. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. and the resulting project files. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 3 In the drawing area. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. click the Condo Complex. When you are working in the host project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. 2 On the Tools menu. do so before continuing. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to.coordinates are used. click Open. If you have not completed the lesson. In this case. Select Site_Project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project.rvt and click Open. open it before continuing. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates.

You also relocate the shared origin of the project. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. and Lot C. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. These three locations can be named Lot A. but can have multiple additional locations. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 797 . click to select it. and click OK. it is placed at a specific location.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. If you have not completed the exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. do so before continuing. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. Lot B. when the edges highlight. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. this location is not saved outside of the host project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. even though both models originate from one linked file. In this exercise. However. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. select Location 1. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. On the Status Bar. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. move the cursor over the left townhouse and.

changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. enter Lot A for New. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Rename. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. click . Record the current position as a location. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. and click OK. click OK. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. . click Not Shared for Shared Location. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. under Instance Parameters. 4 Under Value. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.2 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Select Location dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. In the Choose Location dialog. click Change. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. 12 On the Options Bar. click Reconcile. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. When constraining a link to a location. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. This is a one-time operation. select Move instance to. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

25 In the Manage Links dialog. make sure Lot B is selected. the active location position is moved. select Save. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. 30 On the Tools menu. 23 Click Save Locations. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. To explicitly save a location. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. When you create a location. and the left townhouse resides at that location. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. enter Lot B for Name. Record current position as. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. The second click specifies the move endpoint.Notice the OK button is not active. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 799 . and click OK. and click OK. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. This is a two-click process. 26 Click OK. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. click Duplicate. click OK. Notice the OK button is still not active. Save locations 21 On the File menu. ignore the warning. click Manage Links. click OK. or cancel the action. When you relocate a project. click the Revit tab. you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. select the second option. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and then select the townhouse project. and click OK. When you release the mouse button. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. a warning displays. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Because Lot A is currently in use. By relocating a project. The first click specifies the move start point. 19 In the Select Location dialog. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. and click OK. 36 On the File menu. In this exercise. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. select Save. 800 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Save. 34 On the File menu. click Close. NOTE In the following exercise. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you work in one of the linked projects. 33 On the Edit menu. click Undo to return the origin to its original position.

Click Open. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Select c_Condo_Complex. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt file. If you have not completed the exercises. For Positioning. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. double-click 1st Floor. 2 On the File menu.rvt file. select Auto . This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Because this building model only has one named location.By Shared Coordinates. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Working with a Linked Building Model | 801 . When opening the linked file. under Floor Plans. In addition. The current active location is Lot A. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. In this exercise. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. it is placed automatically within the host project. click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. do so before continuing. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. if other models were linked into the same host. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. Also.

under Graphics. and click Make Current. In this exercise. and click OK. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. you need this project file open and in this view. In the host file. In the next exercise. do so before continuing. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. you create a new location. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. If you have not completed the exercises. click OK. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 6 Select Lot B. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. you can select Lot C if necessary. you manage the shared locations. orient a view to true north. 7 Click OK. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. enter Lot C. click Manage Place and Locations. 3 In the Name dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click View Properties. select True North for Orientation. click Duplicate. click Manage Place and Locations. and click OK. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. In this exercise. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. 802 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 803 . You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. do so before continuing.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Close. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Select Site_Project. In this exercise. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. 10 On the File menu. click Open. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you have not completed the exercise. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files.rvt and click Open. You can save the file if you wish. On the Options Bar. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu.

select Doors. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Fields tab. and click OK. 804 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 5 Under Available fields. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files.

8 Click OK. clear Itemize every instance. and then click OK twice. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. under Other. In this exercise. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Family and Type for Sort by. right-click Door Schedule. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 13 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 805 . 14 On the File menu. 12 Select Grand totals. You have completed this tutorial. click Close. expand Schedules/Quantities. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. click Save. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. the schedule lists the total count for each door type.

806 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 807 .

808 .

8 In the New Project dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click Browse. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 4 Under Colors. 809 . they are not saved to project files or template files. which is independent of the project settings.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 3 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. and set it as your default template. Finally. journal cleanup options. under Template file. and your username when using worksets. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. These settings control the graphics. In the first lesson. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment.rte. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. notification preferences. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you modify the system environment. Notice that the drawing area is black. In the second lesson. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you create an office template. select Invert background color. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click OK. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click Training Files. 6 In the New Project dialog. click the Graphics tab. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. selection default options. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. and click OK.

click No. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. click Wall. 12 In the Color dialog. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. clear Invert background color. However. select None. and open Imperial\i_Settings. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. When an error occurs. click the Graphics tab. 18 On the Design Bar. the elements causing the error display using this color. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click Modify. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select yellow. click the Graphics tab. select red. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. and select the wall. 14 Under Notifications. select One hour. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click Modify. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element.rvt. For Tooltip assistance. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click the value for Selection color. click Training Files.10 In the Options dialog. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 26 In the Options dialog. For Selection color. 13 Click the General tab. 15 Click OK. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 11 Under Colors. and click OK. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 22 When prompted to save changes.

Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. including your default project template. However. 7 In the Options dialog. such as in a large. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 8 Click Cancel. centralized.27 Click the General tab. Your login name displays by default. TIP To view a template. and click Open. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Specifying File Locations on page 811. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. and click Browse to select a template. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you specify default file locations. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. do not save the changes. click Places. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. This path is set automatically during the installation process. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Under Username. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 811 . under Default path for family template files. select your preferred Save reminder interval. If prompted. and family libraries. 5 Under Default path for user files. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. click Browse. 3 Under Default template file. For Tooltip assistance. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. click Browse. select Normal. 4 Click Cancel. you can start a new project with that template. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Under Journal File Cleanup. click Browse. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 2 In the Options dialog. 10 In the Places dialog. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. notice the list of library names. click the File Locations tab. family template files. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. These files are used in the software support process. select the folder to save your files to by default.

notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and select it as the library path. and change the name to My Library. 11 In the Places dialog. In the following illustration. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and you can create new libraries. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. under Libraries. or families. and click Open. and Import dialogs. Load. and click the icon side of the field.library names and path. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. or loading a Revit Architecture file. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. When you are opening. templates. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click (Add Value). saving. Save. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects.

17 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit. and decal image files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 15 Under Library Name.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 23 Select My Library. click My Library. Save. 2 In the Options dialog. If you work in a large office. 24 Click 25 Click OK. view the current path. click the Spelling tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. specify the new location here. 19 Click Cancel. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. Specifying Spelling Options | 813 . enter sheetmtl-Cu. click the My Library icon. 3 Under Settings. 22 Click Places. such as bump maps. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and click OK twice. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Specifying Spelling Options on page 813. scroll down the list of building industry terms. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 9 In the text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. If you want to relocate this path. 28 Click OK. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Load. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. This path is determined during installation. 5 In the text editor. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Edit. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. custom color files. and Import dialogs.

3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. If prompted. You can turn snap settings on and off. 21 In the text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. click Restore Defaults. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. you modify snap increments. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Snap Settings on page 814. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 19 Under Settings.rte. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 23 In the Options dialog. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. under Template file. 22 In the text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. you modify snap settings. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.11 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click the Spelling tab. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Browse. click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. delete sheetmtl-CU. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click OK. As you zoom in and out within a view. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Edit. work with snapping turned off. click default template. click OK. do not save the changes. click Text. 4 In the New Project dialog. In this exercise. 18 In the Options dialog. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling.

7 Under Object Snaps. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. clear Chain. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. If you do not have a wheel button. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. enter SM. While sketching. click Wall. zoom out until it does so. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and move the cursor to the right. click OK. For example. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If it does not. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. such as ZO to zoom out.6 Under Dimension Snaps. and enter 1 . TIP To zoom while sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. use the wheel button on your mouse.. Modifying Snap Settings | 815 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Snaps dialog. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.

Modifying Project Settings on page 817. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and click Wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Do not set the wall end point. and specify the wall endpoint. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. and do not save the file. and the wall edges. and delete the value 1’ .This is the increment that you added previously. 21 Move the cursor downward. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. click Modify. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 24 Click OK. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Notice that snapping is once again active. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 18 Enter SM. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. If you move the cursor along the wall.

save the project file with a unique name. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Using these options. and open Imperial\i_Settings. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Finally. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. In the steps that follow. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. annotations. click Training Files. You create and modify materials. lines. Modifying Project Settings | 817 . Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls.rvt. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. fill patterns. and object styles. When you apply a material to an element. you render a region to observe the changes. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and texture of the material. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project.Fieldstone material. and click (Element Properties). 13 Select the lower exterior wall. and double-click 02 Entry Level. When you change properties of a render appearance. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements.Stone. 6 Click Replace.Fieldstone. 9 Click Apply. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. In the steps that follow. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 10 Click the Graphics tab. The properties describe the color. 11 Click OK. select Stone. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . this material provides a starting point for the new material. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. When a model element is loaded into a project. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. In the Materials dialog. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. These details will display in rendered images. enter Masonry . It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. In the next exercise.Fieldstone. and click OK. Masonry . 8 Select Riverstone Blue. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. However. 3 Click (Duplicate).Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . The Render Appearance Library is a local. scale. read-only library for render appearances. and select Masonry . and click OK. for Class.

16 Enter the new wall name. and click OK. 26 On the View Control Bar. 23 While pressing CTRL. 17 For Structure. 24 In the Type Selector. Creating and Applying Materials | 819 . 18 For Finish 1. click (Default 3D View). the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 15 Click Duplicate. 19 On the right side of the Material field. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 20 In the Materials dialog. click Edit. . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.14 In the Element Properties dialog. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Fieldstone on CMU. 25 On the View toolbar. click Edit/New. and click OK. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click in the Material field. click Model Graphics Style. click This is the material that you created. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. select the rear exterior wall. 21 Click OK three times.Fieldstone.Brick. select Masonry .Fieldstone. 22 Select the left exterior wall.

When finished. 29 In the 3D view. 32 In the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. 31 In the Rendering dialog. In the following exercise. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. select Region. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. The rendering process begins. and click Rendering. click Render. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. right-click the Design Bar. under Quality. select the render region (a red rectangle). 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Rendering Dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. select Low or Medium.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

37 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Then click Render again. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. expand Elevations. click Show the model. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 33 In the Rendering dialog. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and double-click West. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 821 . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. in the Rendering dialog. i_Settings-in progress. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Zoom into the model.rvt. click Show the model. and clear Region. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. such as steel. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821.rvt.

click Training Files. select fldstn. click Edit. 8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. enter Fieldstone. click Import. 10 For Name. click . select Custom. 11 Click OK. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 3 Under Pattern Type. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. click 15 For Structure. choose Model. and click OK. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. (Element Properties). and for Import scale. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Material field. enter . 7 Under Custom. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Fieldstone. 9 Under Custom. for Finish 1. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 5 Click New. click Edit/New.56.pat. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.

20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. For example. expand 3D Views.Fieldstone material. click Modify. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. there are often multiple window types within a project. Controlling Object Styles on page 823. under Pattern Type. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles | 823 . Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. i_Settings-in progress. TIP If the pattern does not display. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 22 Click OK three times. you can set the window frame material to By Category. select Model.rvt. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. and double-click 3 Windows. and click OK. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 21 In the Materials dialog. click to select a fill pattern. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. 25 On the View toolbar. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 23 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). 18 Under Surface Pattern.In the Materials dialog.

and click .2 On the keyboard. 8 In the Materials dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. under Materials and Finishes. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Element Properties). 14 In the Materials dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. under Materials and Finishes. . click By Category (located under the materials list). and click 15 Click OK twice. 10 Select the arched window. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click By Category. 11 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice. click in the Value column. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 5 On the Options Bar. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Element Properties). This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 3 On the View Control Bar. for Trim Exterior Material.

21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog.red paint. expand Windows. and click OK. and select Trim. enter Trim . (Duplicate). The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. or keywords include the word red. select Paint.Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 19 For Trim. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. click in the Material column. . and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 23 Click Replace. Controlling Object Styles | 825 . 25 In the search field. select Trim. 18 On the Model Objects tab. for Name. descriptions. type red. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. for Class.

select Use Render Appearance for Shading.rvt. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. click New. 29 In the Materials dialog. (Default 3D view). click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. When you render a 3D view. i_Settings-in progress.rvt. and click OK. for Name. i_Settings-in progress. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 31 On the View toolbar. enter Roof Line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. click OK. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges.26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. 28 Under Shading. is open with the 3D view active. click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 826. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Now that you have created a line pattern. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Red. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Roofs.6 Click OK twice. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 11 For Line Pattern. under Category. select Roof Line. 10 For Line Color. 7 On the View Control Bar. 12 Click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 827 . you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view.

but not the line pattern. NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under 3D Views. double-click to Building. elevations. sections. 14 On the View Control Bar. Plans. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line.13 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line color displays in this view. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 03 Roof. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style.

This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. specify the following: ■ For Plane. For Line Color. select Solid. click New. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Type Selector.16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select Zoning Setback. click Lines. select Roofs. under Category. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. double-click Site. select 5. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 31 Click OK. 25 Click OK twice. 29 For Name. 20 Click OK. select Black. For Line Pattern. click Override. For Color. select Roofs. select Blue. 19 For Line Pattern. for Visibility. select Level: 02 Entry Level. This places the line above the topography. ■ Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 829 . 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 34 On the Options Bar. select Red. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. Click (Draw). enter Zoning Setback. under Floor Plans. under Modify Subcategories. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select 2. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Double Dash 5/8" . 18 For Line Color. select Roof Line. 22 On the Model Categories tab. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern.

and clear Zoning Setback. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Expand Site.■ Click (Line). 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. (Default 3D View). expand Lines. select it. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 44 On the View toolbar. NOTE If Site is not selected. double-click 02 Entry Level. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then clear Property Lines. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 40 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). 39 Click OK. and clear Zoning Setback. and clear Property Lines. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 43 Click OK. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 36 On the View toolbar. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. Modifying Annotations on page 831.

and place a dimension on the floor plan. under Floor Plans. select mm. click Dimension. (Undo). Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.rvt. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click one wall. Modifying Annotations | 831 . and then click outside the second wall. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select Millimeters. i_Settings-in progress. click another wall.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. For Units. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. for Units Format. For Unit suffix. double-click 02 Entry Level. click Modify.Metric and click OK. select Linear . click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Selector. 4 Enter the name Linear .Metric. You have created a new dimension style. click the default value. i_Settings-in progress. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 10 On the Standard toolbar. click Duplicate. 5 Under Text. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. To place a dimension. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. 7 Click OK twice.

19 Click Load. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 In the Tags dialog. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. 21 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag . 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Leave Window Tag . verify that Create is clear.Number is now the assigned tag. 22 Under Loaded Tags.Number as the assigned tag. 14 On the Options Bar. In the preview image. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. click Window Tag .Number. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. click Training Files. the other displays the instance value. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll to Windows and notice that Window Tag . 16 Click Cancel. scroll down to Windows. 27 On the west wall. Window Tag . under Category. notice that the label displays 1i.rfa. In the steps that follow. click (Element Properties).Number. 30 Under Leader. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. notice Window Tags appears twice.Number. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 28 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 24 While pressing CTRL. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. select the 3 window tags. Then press Delete. click the bottom window. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 26 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. Under Category.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Click OK. for Rounding. click the default value.Temporary Dimensions. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the first section. For Unit symbol. i_Settings-in progress. 6 Click OK. and Detail Level Options on page 833. click Modify. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. select 0 decimal places. dimensions use these project settings. Unless overridden.Temporary Dimensions. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Specifying Units of Measurement. select SF. In the second section. 4 In the Project Units dialog. and click OK. 9 Under Doors and Windows.The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. you specify the project units of measurements. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. and Detail Level Options | 833 . you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. select Openings. select Faces. Temporary Dimensions. 3 In the Format dialog. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 32 On the View toolbar. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. dimension values display using this setting. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. In this project. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click the default value. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Unless overridden. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 8 Under Walls. In the final section. select To the nearest 1/16". Specifying Units of Measurement. for Length. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. (Default 3D View). you modify the detail level assignments. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. for Area.rvt.

and expand 3D Views. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.rvt. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. expand Floor Plans. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this table. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. expand Views (all). click . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 12 Click OK. In this exercise. Notice the 1/4" = 1’ 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834. Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. click Training Files. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.When you create a new view and specify its view scale. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. You do not select a view scale to move it. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table.

10 In the Project Browser. select Discipline. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 835 . and notice that each is grouped by discipline. and click Apply.2 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. expand Sheets (all). 14 In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase. expand each view type.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 6 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab. expand each sheet set. and click OK. In the Project Browser. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. under Sheets.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and click OK. notice that views are grouped by phase. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.

you create an office template. If you want to save this file. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and Discipline. Creating an Office Template on page 837. 16 Click the Views tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. click the Folders tab. In the lesson that follows. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. View Type (Family and Type). 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and expand both Architectural and Structural. In this lesson. expand 3D Views. navigate to your preferred directory. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. under Views. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. and click OK. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. and click New.Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. enter a unique file name. and click OK. Proceed to the next lesson. and click OK. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. You can also save these settings in a template file. 21 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. expand Complete.

4 Select the Construction-Default. and double-click North. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. If you have additional projects open. click Browse. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. close them. 2 Under Template file. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. for Create new. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 6 Click OK. 12 Under Template File. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Whenever you create a new project or template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. You can choose from several templates. and click Open. Creating an Office Template | 837 . but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. dimensions styles. 9 In the Project Browser. and view names. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. When you create a new template based on an existing template. select Project. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. when you create a new project. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. For example. click Browse. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. In that case. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. the same rules apply. 7 In the Project Browser. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. levels.Creating an Office Template In this lesson.rte template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. you select the starting point for your office template. 5 In the New Project dialog. When you create new projects. in the drawing area. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\Templates.

For example. create and modify them as needed. weights. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. transparency. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When you create or modify a material. texture. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. If you want to use a template other than the default. you modify the project settings for your new template. TIP For more information about creating new materials. When you create the material. you can select it now. Observe the materials that are already defined. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. and similar attributes. In this exercise. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Modifying System Settings on page 809. Modifying Project Settings on page 838.13 Select the default template. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. During this exercise. specific modifications are not dictated. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. see the previous lesson. 14 Click Open. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. see Modifying Project Settings on page 817. For more details on modifying these settings. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. You do this by defining the render appearance. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. including color. and click OK. select Project template. or refer to the online help. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. or refer to the online help. 15 Under Create new. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 2 Scroll down the materials list. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles.

line color. the changes are saved as part of the project template. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. and create new subcategories as needed. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. line patterns. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. In the Object Styles dialog. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. see a preview of the rendered material. and imported objects. and move model patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. Modifying Project Settings | 839 . 9 Click OK when finished. line colors. or line pattern as needed. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. You can add and delete view scales. see Specifying File Locations on page 811. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 13 If necessary. You can align. and materials for model objects. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 15 Modify categories. you can set line weights. 4 Click Replace. See Modifying Project Settings on page 817 for more information on creating new fill patterns. create new line subcategories. or modify existing patterns. 19 If necessary. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. create new subcategories.3 Click the Render Appearance tab. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and change render appearance properties. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. modify the line weight. annotation objects. rotate. If you change render appearance properties. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. For more information. 20 Click OK. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 18 For existing line categories.

You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 29 Click OK. and radial dimensions are modified separately. name the style. and dimensions. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 34 Click OK. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Linear. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. and specify the properties. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 32 To modify a line pattern. select it from this list. and click Edit. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 46 Click OK. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. To see the details of a particular style. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. click Duplicate. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. tags. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed.The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 40 Click OK. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. click Duplicate. select it from this list. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. angular. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. and specify the properties. such as section lines and dimension lines. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. select it. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. To see the details of a particular style. name the style.

Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 55 Click OK. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 65 Click OK.47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 61 Under Doors and Windows. click Format. when you add a door with the tag option selected. The detail level is based on view scale. and click OK. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. Medium. 64 Review the table. 50 To load new annotation tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. To move the view scales. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. click Load. 58 Click OK. For example. Volume. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 60 Under Walls. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. In the Tags dialog. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. When you create a new view. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 57 Specify the Slope option. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. TIP In the drawing area. and move view scales as needed. click the arrows between columns. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 62 Click OK. or Fine. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. and choose a decimal symbol. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 53 For Length. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Using the arrows between the columns. Modifying Project Settings | 841 . you can move view scales from one detail level to another. and Angle settings. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category.

rename. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. Although these settings can be saved within a template. or edit existing organization types. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. However. rename. or edit existing organization types. or electrical fixtures. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. you can set up the phases. You can find additional information in Help. and make modifications in each area as necessary. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. 69 If necessary. 73 Click OK. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 71 Delete. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Links to associated tutorials are provided. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Each command is available on the Settings menu. 70 Click the Sheets tab. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. For example. create new browser organization types. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. This could be useful for things such as hardware. 68 Delete. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. Phases Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 599 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. In such a case. phase filters. In a typical project.Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click the Views tab. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Use the table below as a checklist. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. Project Phasing on page 767 If necessary. create new browser organization types. 72 If necessary. furniture. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If necessary. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects.

For example. and electrical fixtures. Although this is possible. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695 Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. click Bar. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. However. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. or use the Project Browser. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. if you load every available window type. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. or add to this selection. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you could load detail components. you may want to delete. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. title blocks. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. 3 To modify. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Depending on the intended use of this template. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 843. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. notice the list of doors already loaded. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. the section cut material. Although the options are endless. click Load. you do both. or modify a door. Select it. Site Settings If necessary. 2 In the Type Selector. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. create. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. there are some important thoughts to consider. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. you can set the default contour line interval. or load a new door type. click Door.Settings Menu Command View Templates Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 843 . In addition. You can load any family or group into a template. If this selection is satisfactory. and click Open. modify. and the poche depth. do so before starting this exercise. you can move onto the next component type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. For example. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. create. In the steps that follow.

Notice that each family category is listed. and click OK. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Click Duplicate. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser.Goal: Modify door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. and select the title block type. Enter a name. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.) 10 Expand the title block. Modify type properties. 9 Expand Annotation Symbols. Make modifications. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. and click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. click Edit/New. expand Families. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Create new door type 4 Click OK.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. Discipline. you will first modify view templates. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. To load a title block. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. you created new projects using different templates. 13 Click OK. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. load. Detail Level. click 12 Click Preview. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command.11 On the Options Bar. click Load. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. create. (Element Properties). To do so. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. In this exercise. In addition. View Range. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. This title block is currently part of the template. you create the views required for your template. In addition. right-click the component. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Modifying Views and View Templates | 845 . and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. and click Delete. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. In this exercise. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner.

under Floor Plans. and click OK. click Apply. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. under Elevations. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Notice the level names. open the view from the Project Browser. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. Every time a new plan view is created. In addition. and click OK. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 12 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Names. Black level heads have no associated views.Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. At any time. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and then click OK. 4 If necessary. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. select Architectural Plan. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. double-click Site. select Site Plan. 6 Click OK. 15 In the Project Browser. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you can apply a view template to any view. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. After applying the template. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. double-click South. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. and apply the appropriate template. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. click Apply. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 11 Click Apply. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. and double-click Level 1. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level.

right-click the ViewCube. right-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. If prompted. and select the desired view.20 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Project Browser. and select the desired direction. Rename. and click Save View. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. If you want to modify view properties. Modifying Views and View Templates | 847 . right-click the view name. right-click {3D}. 31 Rename the 3D View. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. review the existing floor plans. use the ViewCube. notice that you have the option to rename. right-click the ViewCube. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. click 29 In the Project Browser. and modify their properties accordingly. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. select Make Plan View. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. (Default 3D View). 27 Create additional levels as needed. 22 In the Project Browser. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. 23 To add more levels to the template. To orient the 3D view to another view. under Floor Plans. click Schedule/Quantities. review the floor plans. click Level. enter a view name. in the Project Browser. You can add schedules to a template. and click Properties. By default. expand 3D Views. ceiling plans. or delete this view. If it does not display. 21 In the Project Browser. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. click Orient to a Direction. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. click Orient to View. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. duplicate. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. in the shortcut menu. right-click the ViewCube. To orient the 3D view to a direction. and click Rename. and. or delete them as needed. or an edge of the ViewCube. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. a face. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. on the View toolbar. and elevations. duplicate. 24 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views.

41 To rename or renumber the sheet. on the View tab of the Design Bar. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. 848 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP In the Export Layers dialog. On the Filter tab. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. To later add a title block to a sheet. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. On the Appearance tab. click Sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. select one. expand Sheets (all). You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. modify settings as needed. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. assign filters. On the Formatting tab. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. and click Rename. You are prompted to select a title block.35 If you want to add schedules to your template.txt for AutoCAD. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. or exportlayersdgn. 37 Click OK. modify settings as needed. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. Right-click the sheet name. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 848. in the Project Browser. To do so. After the sheet is created. Select a view. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. and click OK. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. select the title block and delete it. select the category type. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. select the default title block. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. 40 To add views to the sheet.txt for MicroStation). Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. select and order required fields. modify settings as needed. 42 Create new sheets as needed. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and click OK. You can still add views to the sheet. and click OK.

project parameters. and so on. For example. When scheduling. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 8 In the dialog. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. select Save As. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. 9 Click Save As. This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 5 For each category. and so on. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. They cannot be shared with other projects. You can save these mappings to a text file. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 255 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 849 . windows. name the file. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. for example. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. These settings are retained within the project template. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. project parameters. click Save As. therefore. and they become the set mappings for the project. name the file. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and click Save. and click Save. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1.2 For each category. doors. and click Save. When you create a multi-category schedule. Using shared parameters. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. because each office has a unique set of needs. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. name the file.

5 Enter the group name. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group.on page 231. click New. 8 Under Parameters. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and click OK. 14 Click Add. select a group to add parameters to. and choose a shared parameter. 3 Name and save the file. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. 6 Create as many groups as needed. for Name. 850 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Add project parameters as needed. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Project parameter. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and specify its discipline and type. 17 Under Discipline. 26 Click OK. and select Shared Parameter. 11 For each parameter group. 25 Click Select. 9 Name the parameter. 22 Click OK. enter a parameter name. under Groups. 10 Click OK. add required parameters. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. If a file already exists. 2 Click Create. 27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 21 Under Categories. select a parameter value type. 16 Under Parameter Data. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. you can create a list of parameters. For each parameter group. click New. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. select a parameter discipline type. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 28 Click OK. click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. 19 Under Group parameter under. 24 To add a shared project parameter. you may want to save the file to a network location.

For each printer. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. select the tag. click OK. 32 Navigate to the directory. for Name. you create named print settings. Creating Named Print Settings | 851 . You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. modify the printer settings. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. select Multi-Category. and create new settings for this printer. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. paper placement. 37 When you have completed the schedule. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. and click OK. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. and click OK. Create additional settings as needed. click Save as. 4 Modify the printer settings. and the percent of actual size. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 2 Under Printer.29 Add shared project parameters as needed. you can set options such as sheet sizes. By creating named settings within the template. 34 For Category. 35 For Name. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. click Setup. By going first to the Print command. and click Open. select a different printer. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. or refer to the online help. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 9 In the Print dialog. click Setup. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 3 Under Settings. The tag is now part of the template. you can load them into the template. you need only select a setting. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. and make it your default template file. 5 Click Save As. In this exercise. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. save the file as a template. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. and print. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. make minor modifications if necessary. enter a name for the schedule. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. For information on creating multi-category tags. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. enter a new name for the printer. 6 In the New dialog.

and saved them to a template. select it. click Browse. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. save it in a network location. In this lesson. 24 Navigate to the template location. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. In addition. and click Open. 852 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Click OK. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 23 For Default template file. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 15 Name the template. If you need to share this file with others.10 Repeat these steps as needed. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. In addition. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 Click Close when finished. and click Save. 14 Under Save as type. 22 Click the File Locations tab. you modified settings. You can also set this template as your default template. 19 Select the template. select Template Files (*. 18 Click Browse. By investing the time to individualize your template. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open.rte). 25 Click OK. If you have a project. The only remaining task is to save it. Your template is complete. loaded components. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful